Kodak Cr Topics Soft. Ver. 5.2

5/22/2018

Koda k Cr Topic s Sof t. Ve r. 5.2 - slide pdf.c om

Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09 8G0242 29 January 2009 Version 2.0

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/koda k-c r-topic s-sof t-ve r-52

1/454

5/22/2018



2/454

5/22/2018


Table Of Contents General Information ...................................................................................................................................... 1 New Features ................................................................................................................................................ 1 Use of CR System and DR System Terminology.......................................................................................... 2 About Online Help......................................................................................................................................... 3 Software Version ....................................................................................................................................... 3 How Do I Access and Navigate Help?....................................................................................................... 3 Document Conventions ............................................................................................................................. 3 KODAK DIRECTVIEW Software................................................................................................................... 4 Trademark and Copyright Information....................................................................................................... 4 FCC Compliance ....................................................................................................................................... 4 How to Contact Carestream Health, Inc. ......................................................................................................5 AEC Calibration............................................................................................................................................. 6 CR System Overviews .................................................................................................................................. 7 Main Menu Functions....................................................................................................................................7 Quick Reference Button Guide ..................................................................................................................... 9 Radiographer's Screen Guide.....................................................................................................................12 CR System Software Overview................................................................................................................... 13 CR Modality Overview................................................................................................................................. 14 Brightness, Latitude, and Detail Contrast Definitions.................................................................................. 15 Scheduled Workflow ................................................................................................................................... 17 Workflow Configurations ............................................................................................................................. 17 Modality Performed Procedure Step (MPPS) ............................................................................................. 18 Scheduled Workflow Configurations........................................................................................................... 19 Scanning Equipment and Procedures ........................................................................................................ 21 Scanning CR Cassettes Menu.................................................................................................................... 21 Using the Touch-Screen.............................................................................................................................. 22 High-Resolution Scanning........................................................................................................................... 23 What Are Scan Modes?........................................................................................................................... 23 Slow System Response .............................................................................................................................. 24 CR System Freeze-up................................................................................................................................. 25

Scanning on a Classic/Elite CR System .....................................................................................................26 Loading a Cassette.................................................................................................................................. 26 Scanning on a CR 825/850 System............................................................................................................ 27 Loading a Cassette.................................................................................................................................. 27 Scanning on a CR 950/975 System............................................................................................................ 28 Loading Cassettes ................................................................................................................................... 28

iii http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/koda k-c r-topic s-sof t-ve r-52

3/454

5/22/2018


Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Purchasing Erase Lamps ............................................................................................................................ 30 Logging and Shutdown Procedures............................................................................................................ 31 Logging On and Logging Out of the Modality ............................................................................................. 31 Shutting Down the CR System ................................................................................................................... 32

Restarting Versus Rebooting ...................................................................................................................... 34 Using the Shutdown Button......................................................................................................................... 35 Scan Status Screen..................................................................................................................................... 37 Patient Information Bar ...............................................................................................................................37 Using the Erase Cassette Tab..................................................................................................................... 38 Using the Erase Lamp Status Tab............................................................................................................... 39 Using the Scan Status Screen .................................................................................................................... 40 CR 825/850/950/975 Systems................................................................................................................. 40 Classic/Elite CR Systems ........................................................................................................................40 Using the Scan Status Tab .......................................................................................................................... 42 Using the System Recovery Tab ................................................................................................................. 43 Cassettes, Troubleshooting, and Error Messages...................................................................................... 45 Cassette Jams ............................................................................................................................................ 45 CR 825/850/950/975 Systems................................................................................................................. 45 Classic/Elite CR Systems ........................................................................................................................45 Scanner Error .............................................................................................................................................. 46 Scanning CR Cassettes Menu.................................................................................................................... 47 Resolving Cassette ID Errors...................................................................................................................... 48 Bar-Code Scanner ...................................................................................................................................... 49 Entering Information with the Bar-Code Scanner ....................................................................................... 49 Information Does Not Appear...................................................................................................................... 50 Where Can I Use the Bar-Code Scanner?.................................................................................................. 51 CR System Exams................................................................................................................................... 53 Beginning a Patient Exam...........................................................................................................................53 Completing an Exam Set-up .......................................................................................................................55 Setting Up Views for My Procedure ............................................................................................................ 57 Accepting the Image ................................................................................................................................... 59 Correcting Image Artifacts........................................................................................................................... 60 Modifying a Delivered Image.......................................................................................................................61 Flagging an Image for Review .................................................................................................................... 62 Low Contrast Images due to IPL Parameters Failure................................................................................. 63 Rejecting an Image ..................................................................................................................................... 64 Reviewing Images.......................................................................................................................................65 Adjusting Image Quality...........................................................................................................................66

iv http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/koda k-c r-topic s-sof t-ve r-52

4/454

5/22/2018


Table Of Contents

Adjusting Image Parameters Menu............................................................................................................. 66 Adjusting Image Quality Controls................................................................................................................ 67 How to Use Window/Level .......................................................................................................................... 68 Increasing Latitude...................................................................................................................................... 69

Image Processing Failure ........................................................................................................................... 70 Reprocessing the Image ............................................................................................................................. 71 Using the Histogram.................................................................................................................................... 72 Using the Image Adjustment Tab ................................................................................................................ 73 Using the Image Viewer Screen.................................................................................................................. 74 Image Viewer Palette Tabs...................................................................................................................... 74 Adjusting for More Detail............................................................................................................................. 76 Assigning and Unassigning Images ........................................................................................................77 Assigning an Image.....................................................................................................................................77

Assigning an Image to a Different Patient...................................................................................................78 How an Image Becomes Unassigned......................................................................................................... 79 Unassigning an Image ................................................................................................................................80 Cropping Images ..................................................................................................................................... 81 Using the Crop Box Adjustment Tab ........................................................................................................... 81 Using Manual Cropping............................................................................................................................... 83 Delivering Images .................................................................................................................................... 85 Automatic Delivery or Manual Delivery ....................................................................................................... 85 Viewing a Thumbnail Image........................................................................................................................86 Auto Display in QA Mode ............................................................................................................................ 87 Pass-through Mode..................................................................................................................................... 88 Auto Display in QA Mode ............................................................................................................................ 89 Acceptance by Image .............................................................................................................................. 89 Acceptance by Study...............................................................................................................................89 Storage Commitment Function ................................................................................................................... 90 Distributing Images ..................................................................................................................................91 Sending Images to a Different Location...................................................................................................... 91 Distributing the Image .................................................................................................................................92 Entering and Deleting Data...................................................................................................................... 93

v http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/koda k-c r-topic s-sof t-ve r-52

5/454

5/22/2018



Auto-Associating Information...................................................................................................................... 93 Creating an Additional Study....................................................................................................................... 94 Displaying the Procedures List ................................................................................................................... 95 Displaying Other Studies for a Patient ........................................................................................................ 96

Displaying Image Icons ...............................................................................................................................97 Modifying Information..................................................................................................................................98 How to End a Study..................................................................................................................................... 99 Entering Temporary Trauma Patient Data for Performing a Trauma Exam ..............................................100 Entering Additional Exam Information....................................................................................................... 101 Exam Information................................................................................................................................... 101 More Information.................................................................................................................................... 101 More Image Data ...................................................................................................................................102 Resolving Cassette ID Errors.................................................................................................................... 103 Using the Patient Input Screen ................................................................................................................. 104 More Image Data ...................................................................................................................................... 105 More Information....................................................................................................................................... 107 Image Orientation and Appearance....................................................................................................... 108 Using the View/Look Adjustment Tab........................................................................................................ 108 Reducing Noise.........................................................................................................................................109 Using Grid Suppression Software............................................................................................................. 110 Magnification Tab .......................................................................................................................................111 Rotating and Flipping the Image ............................................................................................................... 112 Reversing the Image ................................................................................................................................. 113 Using the Comment Tab............................................................................................................................ 114 Review Needed Status.............................................................................................................................. 115 Markers..................................................................................................................................................116 Markers Menu ........................................................................................................................................... 116 Adding Markers......................................................................................................................................... 117 Adding the Text Marker ............................................................................................................................. 119 Moving a Marker ....................................................................................................................................... 120 Removing a Marker................................................................................................................................... 121 Using the Favorites Markers ..................................................................................................................... 122 Using the Measures Markers .................................................................................................................... 123 Using the Others Marker Group................................................................................................................ 124 Using the Time Markers ............................................................................................................................ 126 Masking.................................................................................................................................................. 127

vi http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/koda k-c r-topic s-sof t-ve r-52

6/454

5/22/2018


Table Of Contents

Using the Surround Mask Tab................................................................................................................... 127 Masking Failure......................................................................................................................................... 129 Applying Automatic Surround Mask (optional).......................................................................................... 130 Mask Points Are Off the Screen ................................................................................................................ 131

Applying Manual Surround Mask (optional) ..............................................................................................132 Reprocessing After Using Edit Mask.........................................................................................................133 Measurement Tools ...............................................................................................................................134 Using Measurement Tools......................................................................................................................... 134 Measurement Tool Sample .......................................................................................................................136 Optimizing the Exam.............................................................................................................................. 136 Optimizing the Exam.............................................................................................................................. 137 Performing the Exam ................................................................................................................................137 Improving Acquisition Techniques.............................................................................................................139 How can I improve my image quality?...................................................................................................139 Guidelines for Good Exposures............................................................................................................. 139 Determining the Exposure Index............................................................................................................... 140 Patient CD.............................................................................................................................................. 142 Patient CD (optional)................................................................................................................................. 142 Printing ................................................................................................................................................... 144 Using the Print Tab .................................................................................................................................... 144 Using the Multi-format Configuration Screen............................................................................................146 Selecting a Destination ............................................................................................................................. 148 Selecting a Text Box.................................................................................................................................. 149 Positioning an Internal Text Box................................................................................................................ 150 Positioning an External Text Box............................................................................................................... 151 Creating a True-size Print ......................................................................................................................... 152 What Is Multi-format Printing?................................................................................................................... 153 Best Fit to Print.......................................................................................................................................... 154 Creating Multi-format Prints ......................................................................................................................155 Selecting Multi-formats.............................................................................................................................. 157 Adding a Multi-format Print........................................................................................................................158 Searching Techniques........................................................................................................................... 159

vii http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/koda k-c r-topic s-sof t-ve r-52

7/454

5/22/2018



Finding an Image ...................................................................................................................................... 159 Identifying Work List Colors ......................................................................................................................160 Improving Search Results.........................................................................................................................161 Searching for an Existing Patient.............................................................................................................. 164

Using the Patient Query Screen ...............................................................................................................166 Using the Patient Work List Screen .......................................................................................................... 167 Using the Image List Screen..................................................................................................................... 168 Views .....................................................................................................................................................170 Defining a View .........................................................................................................................................170 Adding a View ...........................................................................................................................................171 Deleting a View .........................................................................................................................................172 Changing the View Name ......................................................................................................................... 173 Capture Link System................................................................................................................................. 175

Basic information ................................................................................................................................... 175 Joining Devices ......................................................................................................................................... 175 Capture Link System Workflow................................................................................................................. 176 Capture Link System Range of Operation ................................................................................................ 177 Identifying Active Devices in the Capture Link System............................................................................. 182 Identifying Icons ........................................................................................................................................183 Using the Capture Link System ................................................................................................................ 185 Standalone Mode ...................................................................................................................................... 187 Basic Capture Link System Operations.................................................................................................188 Changing Image Processing in the Capture Link System ........................................................................ 188 Configuring Destination Profiles with the Capture Link System................................................................ 190 Communicating with the HIS/RIS.............................................................................................................. 192 Entering Data in the Capture Link System................................................................................................ 193 Image Review with the Capture Link System ...........................................................................................194 Multi-format Printing with the Capture Link System.................................................................................. 195 Scanning Long-Length Images (LLI) on the Capture Link System........................................................... 196 Capture Link System Communications ................................................................................................. 197 Image Recovery on the Capture Link System ..........................................................................................197 Rejoining the Capture Link System........................................................................................................... 199 Redelivering an Image .............................................................................................................................. 200 Using Image Recovery to Capture Link .................................................................................................... 201 Capture Link Configuration....................................................................................................................202

viii http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/koda k-c r-topic s-sof t-ve r-52

8/454

5/22/2018


Table Of Contents

Making Preference Editor Changes in the Capture Link System..............................................................202 Capture Link Configuration Screen........................................................................................................... 204 Configuring and Connecting a Console or Accessory Device ..................................................................205 Capture Link System Requirements ......................................................................................................... 206

Restoring Configurations from the Server to a Standalone Machine........................................................207 Removing a Console from the Capture Link System ................................................................................ 208 Troubleshooting the Capture Link System................................................................................................ 209 Capture Link Server Help ...................................................................................................................... 210 Capture Link Server Safety and Regulatory .............................................................................................210 EMC ....................................................................................................................................................... 210 Safety ..................................................................................................................................................... 210 Logging On to the Capture Link Server .................................................................................................... 211 Using the Capture Link Server Status Screen .......................................................................................... 212 Using the Capture Link Server.................................................................................................................. 213 Key Operator Functions ............................................................................................................................ 215 Key Operator Functions Menu .................................................................................................................. 215 Backup and Restore Configurations ......................................................................................................... 216 Navigational Buttons..............................................................................................................................219 Bar-Code Scanner Configuration .......................................................................................................... 220 Programming the Automatic Trigger ......................................................................................................... 220 Bar-Code Configuration Menu .................................................................................................................. 221 How to Configure a Bar-Code................................................................................................................... 221 Bar-Code Configuration ............................................................................................................................ 222 Bar-Code Programming ............................................................................................................................ 224 How to Change the Beeper Mode............................................................................................................. 225 How to Change the Cassette ID format ....................................................................................................226 Changing the Country Code...................................................................................................................... 227 Changing the Data Field Size ................................................................................................................... 229 Changing the Prefix and Suffix..................................................................................................................230 Configuring Reread Delay......................................................................................................................... 231 Stripping a Bar-Code Field........................................................................................................................232 Stripping Middle Characters from the Bar-Code ....................................................................................... 233 Using the Bar-Code Configuration Screen................................................................................................ 234 Bar-Code Programming Samples....................................................................................................... 236

ix http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/koda k-c r-topic s-sof t-ve r-52

9/454

5/22/2018



Bar-Code Programming Samples .............................................................................................................236 Bar-Code Programming Samples (Page 2) ..............................................................................................238 Bar-Code Programming Samples (Page 3) ..............................................................................................240 Bar-Code Programming Samples (Page 4) ..............................................................................................242

Bar-Code Programming Samples (Page 5) ..............................................................................................244 Bar-Code Programming Samples (Page 6) ..............................................................................................246 Bar-Code Programming Samples (Page 7) ..............................................................................................247 Programming the Keyboard Wedge Bar-Code Reader ............................................................................ 248 Programming the Keyboard Wedge Bar-Code Reader and Add Suffix .................................................... 250 Programming the PS2 Keyboard Bar-Code Reader................................................................................. 252 Programming the PS2 Keyboard Bar-Code Reader and Add Suffix......................................................... 254 Programming the PS2 to USB Keyboard Bar-Code Reader .................................................................... 256 Programming the PS2 to USB Keyboard Bar-Code Reader and Add Suffix ............................................ 258 Programming the Serial Scanner Bar-Code Reader ................................................................................ 259 Programming the USB as Serial Bar-Code Reader.................................................................................. 260 HIS/RIS Communications Configuration ............................................................................................... 261 How to Configure for a Polling Query ....................................................................................................... 261 HIS/RIS Options ........................................................................................................................................ 261 Navigation Buttons................................................................................................................................. 262 HIS/RIS Polling Query............................................................................................................................... 263 How to Change Field Descriptions............................................................................................................265 Navigation Buttons................................................................................................................................. 265 Long-Length Imaging Configuration..........................................................................................................266 Required Source to Image (SID) values................................................................................................ 266 Navigation Buttons................................................................................................................................. 266 Setting the Limits for Image Retention...................................................................................................... 267 Color Preferences Configuration............................................................................................................... 268 Navigational Buttons..............................................................................................................................268 Delivery Preferences Configuration .......................................................................................................... 269 Display Configuration................................................................................................................................271 Harvesting Flagged Images ...................................................................................................................... 274 Flagged Image List Controls.................................................................................................................. 274 Why Didn't My Images Transfer? .......................................................................................................... 275 Monitor Calibration................................................................................................................................. 276 Monitor Calibration Introduction ................................................................................................................ 276 Why Can't I Start the Test?.................................................................................................................... 276

x http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/koda k-c r-topic s-sof t-ve r-52

10/454

5/22/2018


Table Of Contents

Display Pro for General Radiography .......................................................................................................277 SMPTE Test Target ................................................................................................................................... 278 Monitor Calibration.................................................................................................................................... 279 Why Can't I Start the Test?.................................................................................................................... 279 Touch-screen Calibration .......................................................................................................................... 280 Why Can't I Get to the Calibration Screen?...........................................................................................280 Measuring Luminance for Tracking........................................................................................................... 281 Measuring Luminance for Gamma............................................................................................................ 282 How to Order a VERILUM CHROMA 5 Photometer ................................................................................. 283 Regional Configuration.............................................................................................................................. 284 System Configuration ............................................................................................................................ 285 Layout Configuration................................................................................................................................. 285 Patient Input Screen Layout Samples ................................................................................................... 286 List Configuration ...................................................................................................................................... 289 Navigation Buttons................................................................................................................................. 289

Procedure Mapping Configuration (optional) ............................................................................................ 291 Navigation Buttons................................................................................................................................. 291 Reject Reasons Configuration .................................................................................................................. 293 Navigation Buttons................................................................................................................................. 293 Required Fields Configuration................................................................................................................... 295 Navigational Buttons..............................................................................................................................295 Image Viewer Editor Configuration........................................................................................................296 Changing Image Processing Preferences ................................................................................................ 296 Navigational Buttons..............................................................................................................................297 What Is a Look? ........................................................................................................................................ 299 The Family of Looks .............................................................................................................................. 299 What Is a DICOM GSDF-calibrated Monitor?...........................................................................................300 Region of Interest (ROI) Tool .................................................................................................................... 301 Mean Code Value Usefulness ...............................................................................................................302 Image Processing Controls....................................................................................................................... 303 Using View Before and After ..................................................................................................................... 304 Changing the Look .................................................................................................................................... 305 Navigational Buttons..............................................................................................................................305 Configuring Destination Profiles ............................................................................................................ 306

What Is a Destination Profile?................................................................................................................... 306 Destination Profile Configuration .............................................................................................................. 307 Navigational Buttons..............................................................................................................................308 View Configuration................................................................................................................................. 309 View Configuration.................................................................................................................................... 309 Navigational Buttons..............................................................................................................................311

xi http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/koda k-c r-topic s-sof t-ve r-52

11/454

5/22/2018



Tab Controls ..........................................................................................................................................312 Configuring Surround Mask Enlargement................................................................................................. 314 Surround Mask Enlargement Appearance ............................................................................................314 Changing View Configuration Attributes ................................................................................................... 316 Navigation Buttons................................................................................................................................. 316 Managing View Categories ....................................................................................................................... 317

What Is a SNOMED® Code.......................................................................................................................318 Trauma Default Configuration................................................................................................................ 319 Trauma Defaults Configuration ................................................................................................................. 319 Navigation Buttons................................................................................................................................. 319 Entering or Changing Trauma Exam Data................................................................................................ 321 Hiding Trauma Exam Buttons ................................................................................................................... 322 Statistics................................................................................................................................................. 323 Viewing Radiographer's Statistics .............................................................................................................323 Navigational Buttons..............................................................................................................................323 Viewing Destination Summary Statistics...................................................................................................324 Navigation Buttons................................................................................................................................. 324 Viewing the Flagged Image List................................................................................................................325 Navigation Buttons................................................................................................................................. 325 Downloading Statistics .............................................................................................................................. 326 Navigation Buttons................................................................................................................................. 326 Cassette Statistics..................................................................................................................................... 327 Erase Cycles ............................................................................................................................................. 328

Exporting Data........................................................................................................................................... 329 Text Box Configuration .......................................................................................................................... 331 Configurable Text Box Menu ..................................................................................................................... 331 Configuring Text Boxes ............................................................................................................................. 332 Multi-format Image Internal Text Box ........................................................................................................ 333 Selecting an Internal or an External Text Box ...........................................................................................334 Using a Single Image Internal Text Box ....................................................................................................335 Using a Multi-format Image Internal Text Box ........................................................................................... 336 Using a Multi-format Image External Text Box.......................................................................................... 337 Using a Multi-format Page External Text Box ...........................................................................................338 Using a Single Image External Text Box................................................................................................... 339 Selecting a Default Multi-format Text Box ................................................................................................. 340 Editing a Text Box ..................................................................................................................................... 341 What are the Text Box Editing Controls? ..............................................................................................342

xii http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/koda k-c r-topic s-sof t-ve r-52

12/454

5/22/2018


Table Of Contents

Configurable Text Box Options.................................................................................................................. 344 Managing Patient Exam Records ............................................................................................................. 345 Navigational Controls............................................................................................................................. 345 Register and Activate Options................................................................................................................... 346 Navigational Buttons..............................................................................................................................347 Scanner Options ....................................................................................................................................... 348 CSA Log Viewer ........................................................................................................................................ 349 Remote Devices........................................................................................................................................ 351 Configuring Remote Devices .................................................................................................................... 351 Navigational Buttons..............................................................................................................................351 Setting Up Remote Access to the CR or DR System ............................................................................... 353 Remote Workstation Options .................................................................................................................... 354 Easy to Use Remote Access Software .....................................................................................................356 ROP Links Configuration........................................................................................................................... 357 Administrative Analysis and Reporting Feature ........................................................................................ 358 Remote Patient Data Entry System .......................................................................................................... 359 Remote Patient Data Entry System (RPDES) .......................................................................................... 359 Local User Interface.................................................................................................................................. 361 Local User Interface Main Menu ...............................................................................................................361 Using the Volume Settings Tab ................................................................................................................. 364 Long-Length Imaging ................................................................................................................................365 Long-Length Imaging Menu ......................................................................................................................365 Acquiring Images................................................................................................................................... 365 Composite Images................................................................................................................................. 365 Acquiring Images................................................................................................................................... 366 Performing a Long-Length Exam ..............................................................................................................366 Optimizing a Long-Length Exam...............................................................................................................367 Entering Data for an LLI Exam..................................................................................................................368 Determining the SID.................................................................................................................................. 369 LLI Techniques .......................................................................................................................................... 370 Scanning Long-Length Images (LLI) on the Capture Link System........................................................... 371 Assigning and Unassigning Long-Length Images (LLI) ............................................................................ 372 KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR Long-Length Grid........................................................................................... 373 Tips for Optimizing Long-length Image Quality.........................................................................................374 Composite Images................................................................................................................................. 375

xiii http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/koda k-c r-topic s-sof t-ve r-52

13/454

5/22/2018



Printing Long-Length Images.................................................................................................................... 375 Viewing Long-Length Images.................................................................................................................... 376 No Composite Image ................................................................................................................................377 Images are Stitched Incorrectly................................................................................................................. 378

Distorted Composite Image....................................................................................................................... 379 Total Quality Tool ....................................................................................................................................... 381 What Is TQT?............................................................................................................................................ 381 Performing System Tests .......................................................................................................................... 382 Testing Cassettes ...................................................................................................................................... 383 Selecting a Test Phantom ......................................................................................................................... 384 Positioning a Test Phantom....................................................................................................................... 385 Appending the Session ............................................................................................................................. 387 Exposure ................................................................................................................................................ 388 Determining the Exposure......................................................................................................................... 388 Collimating for TQT Testing ....................................................................................................................... 389 System Testing ...................................................................................................................................... 390 Using the Total Quality Tool Main Page .................................................................................................... 390 Tests ...................................................................................................................................................... 390 Performing Phantom Tests for General Radiography ............................................................................... 392 Performing the Erased Image Test............................................................................................................ 393 Understanding the System Noise Test......................................................................................................394 Cassette Testing.................................................................................................................................... 395 Cassette Testing Menu.............................................................................................................................. 395 Testing Cassettes with TQT ......................................................................................................................396 Flat-Field Image Test................................................................................................................................. 397 Performing a Flat-Field Image Test ........................................................................................................... 399 Best Results from Cassette Testing .......................................................................................................... 400 Viewing Test Result Indicators .................................................................................................................. 401 Reported Cassette Test Results................................................................................................................ 402 Results...................................................................................................................................................403 Using Results (Page 1) ............................................................................................................................. 403

Using Results (Page 2) ............................................................................................................................. 404 How to Export Data ................................................................................................................................... 405 Additional Tests ..................................................................................................................................... 406

xiv http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/koda k-c r-topic s-sof t-ve r-52

14/454

5/22/2018


Table Of Contents

Cassette Inventory and Inspection............................................................................................................ 406 Cleaning Cassettes ................................................................................................................................... 407 Film-Printer Calibration Test...................................................................................................................... 408 Workstation Display Calibration Test......................................................................................................... 409 Troubleshooting..................................................................................................................................... 410 Phantom Image Test Failure ..................................................................................................................... 410 Flat-field Test Failure ................................................................................................................................. 415 System Noise Test Failure ........................................................................................................................417 Troubleshooting TQT for General Radiography........................................................................................418 Utilities....................................................................................................................................................... 419 Utilities Menu............................................................................................................................................. 419 Changing Your Password .......................................................................................................................... 420 Installing Software Updates ...................................................................................................................... 421 Image Recovery on the Capture Link System ..........................................................................................422 Using the Capture Link Server Status Screen .......................................................................................... 424 Viewing the Status of System Communications........................................................................................425 Glossary .................................................................................................................................................... 427 Index.......................................................................................................................................................... 433

xv http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/koda k-c r-topic s-sof t-ve r-52

15/454

5/22/2018



16/454

5/22/2018


General Information New Features Select the links below for more information about the new features introduced with this software version. Auto-Associate—An automatic association of a cassette with a View is introduced on the Classic/Elite and 825/850 CR Systems. Backup and Restore—Wonder what's backed up and what's not? A complete map of backup features by equipment type is included. Bar-Code Configuration—Configuration for all bar-code readers. New bar-code samples are provided for all bar-code readers. Bar-Code Requisition—The system retrieves an exam from the work list when reading a barcode record of the Accession Number, or Patient ID at the Main Menu or Image Review Screen. Capture Link System—The Range of Operation describes which system configurations are transferred to CR and DR devices when a change in the Capture Link System occurs. Carestream Health Display Pro Target—Provides a visual density scale to determine whether the monitor needs to be calibrated. Local User Interface—A complete feature menu is available on the Classic/Elite CR System, replacing the Scan Status Screen function. Manual Cropping— Manual Cropping lets you crop an image when printing it onto a film that is smaller than the cassette in which the image was exposed. A crop box is displayed when the Manual Crop feature is activated. The aspect ratio of the crop box is fixed depending upon the printer selected. From the Main Menu, select Image Review. Measurement Tools— You can measure and display the Distance, Angle, and Cobb Angle during the process of reviewing images on the CR or DR Console. More Image Data—You can edit patient information at any time before image delivery. Patient CD—You can make a CD of a patient's study or of all studies for a patient with a push of a button. Region of Interest—The Region of Interest (ROI) is a defined region on the image that reveals the mean pixel value of a selected point. This software version adds optical density to the calculation, so the displayed value now includes the value for the raw (unprocessed) image, as well as the processed image. QA by Image Mode—The Key Operator selects this option in the Delivery Preferences Screen. When an image is associated with a view on the Patient Input Screen, it will immediately open the Image Viewer Screen.

1 http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/koda k-c r-topic s-sof t-ve r-52

17/454

5/22/2018



Use of CR System and DR System Terminology KODAK DIRECTVIEW Version 5 Software has a software base that is used commonly between CR and DR Systems. CR and DR Systems are referred to as the Modality. Common references will be made as Modality. If information applies only to a specific CR or DR system, the system name will be clearly indicated, or the model name will be clearly indicated, such as CR 850 System or DR 7500 System.


18/454

5/22/2018


General Information

About Online Help 29 January 2009

Online Help Version C1.4

Software Version The Online Help provides information on the function of CR Systems operating KODAK DIRECTVIEW Version 5.2 software or higher.

How Do I Access and Navigate Help?

Select the question mark in the upper right corner of the CR or DR screen to open contextsensitive help.

Select the Back or Forward arrows at the top of the Help window to move from screen to screen.

Select the Close button at the top of the Help window to close the Online Help.

Select any blue link to jump to related topics for additional information: Main Menu

Select the Contents tab for access to all of the topics.

Select a term in the Index tab and select Display.

Select the Glossary tab for definitions of terms.

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

Document Conventions The Online Help uses the following messages to emphasize information or potential risks to personnel or equipment: Notes provide additional information, such as expanded explanations, hints, or reminders. Importants highlight critical policy information that affect how you use this information and this product.

Cautions point out procedures that you must follow precisely to avoid injury to yourself, others, damage to the system or any of its components, loss of data, or corruption of files in software applications.

A tip is a technique or best practice recommendation that may improve your workflow.

Study Data indicates the topic is located in the Study Data section of the software. Image Review indicates the topic is located in the Image Review section of the software. Key Operator indicates the path through the Key Operator software to the topic screen.


19/454

5/22/2018



KODAK DIRECTVIEW Software Trademark and Copyright Information DIRECTVIEW and DRYVIEW are trademarks of Carestream Health, Inc. The Kodak trademark and trade dress are used under license from Kodak. This document is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this document may not be copied, in whole or in part, without the written consent of Carestream Health, Inc. Under the law, copying includes translating into another language or format. All names or identities used in this document are fictitious. Federal law restricts this device to sale to, by, or on order of a physician. The information contained herein is based on the experience and knowledge relating to the subject matter gained by Carestream Health, Inc. prior to publication. No patent license is granted by this information. Carestream Health reserves the right to change this information without notice and makes no warranty, express or implied, with respect to this information. Carestream Health shall not be liable for any loss or damage, including consequential or special damages, resulting from the use of this information, even if loss or damage is caused by Carestream Health's negligence or other fault.

FCC Compliance This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case users will be required to correct the interference at their own expense. 29 January 2009 Online Help Version C1.4 PN 8G0242 Carestream Health, Inc. 150 Verona Street Rochester, N.Y. 14608


20/454

5/22/2018


General Information

How to Contact Carestream Health, Inc. In the U.S. and Canada:

•

Contact Carestream Health Technical Service Center when directed by your Service Representative. 1-800-328-2910

•

General Customer Support for US and Canada

150 Verona Street Rochester, NY 14608 1-800-431-7278

•

Cassette Repair Hotline 1-800-322-5711 If the cassette is in warranty, you will be assisted through the process. If the cassette is out of warranty, you will receive a contact for cassette repair and cost.

Elsewhere in the world, contact Carestream Health, Inc. in your country.


21/454

5/22/2018



AEC Calibration The X-ray energy dependence of Computed Radiography detectors may be different than that of intensifying screens used to expose film. Adjustment of the AEC configuration may be necessary to account for the transmission of the KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR Cassette. If AEC adjustment is required, it is appropriate to adjust AEC photo timers over the full range of X-ray energies (kVp) that are used. The recommended exposure level is a general recommendation based on balancing the requirements for high image quality and minimum patient dose. All adjustments that affect patient dose should be done under the guidance of a certified medical physicist to ensure that exposures are in compliance with all applicable guidelines and local regulations. A Medical Physicist or, if permitted by applicable regulations, qualified personnel under direction of a Medical Physicist should:

Perform the necessary acceptance testing

Ensure the X-Ray Unit’s Automatic Exposure Control (AEC) is properly calibrated for use with KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR Cassettes and meets applicable regulations.

Establish and/or approve the use of an exposure technique control chart.

•

•

•

If required, Carestream Health, Inc. can provide guidance for the AEC calibration procedure. Contact your Carestream Health Inc. representative for more information. All AEC adjustments and calibrations must be performed by qualified X-ray equipment manufacturers or trained service providers. See Also

Contact Carestream Health, Inc.


22/454

5/22/2018


CR System Overviews Main Menu Functions The headings throughout the Help are color-coded for easy reference. Function Name

Description

Study Data

Locate Patient and Exam Data

Search for and View all Stored Images Change Image Presentation Add Markers, Change Orientation, Reverse Viewing; turn on/off Grid Suppression and Noise Suppression Change Image Quality Controls, Masking Reprocess Print Images as Single or Multi-Format

Display the Last Scanned Image Erase the Cassette Display the Erase Lamp Status Release Cassette and Phosphor Screen Jams

Set up and Manage System Configurations

Service the Machine (Qualified Service personnel only)

•

•

Enter New Patient Data Create New Studies

•

Access Work Lists

•

Image Review

• • •

• • •

Scan Status

• • • •

Key Operator Functions Service Functions

•

•

•

Utilities

Change Password System Status Software Updates Image Recovery Image Recovery Capture Link Capture Link Server Status

Generate User Names Manage User Accounts Role Settings User Configuration Security Log Configuration Archive Security Log Entries

Immediately opens the Patient Input Screen to create a new patient record.

• • • • •

Security Administrator Functions

• • • • • •

New Patient Button

•

patient record.'

Quick Menu Button

•

Images

•

Not

Provides quick access to logon, logout, and shutdown menus.

Displays the number of images on the system that are not


23/454

5/22/2018



Assigned Button

assigned. Pressing the button takes you to the Image Review Screen where the images are available.

The Key Operator Functions, Service Functions, and Security Administrator Functions are only accessible by authorized personnel. See also:

Quick Reference Button Guide Radiographer's Screen Guide Key Operator Functions Utilities Menu


24/454

5/22/2018


CR System Overviews

Quick Reference Button Guide Select each button name for a description of its function. In the Modality, a gray button indicates that the function is not active or available at that time.

Back

Cancel

Main Menu

Add View

Delete View

Save Changes

Accept Image

Reject Image

Re-Deliver Image

Find Study Locally

Find Study Remotely

Clear Fields

Reprocess

Assign Image

Unassign Image


25/454

5/22/2018



Logon

Logout

Shutdown

Flag Review

Images Failed Deliver

Images Not Assigned

Select Destination

Destination Status

Change Destination Profile

Print

Add Multiformat Print

Delete Multiformat Print

Change Multiformat Configuration

Multi-format

Trauma

to

Quick Menu

for

Marker

Discontinue/Cancel


26/454

5/22/2018


CR System Overviews

Next Page

Previous Page

New Patient

New Study

Begin Study

End Study

Accept All

Continue Saving

Without


27/454

5/22/2018



Radiographer's Screen Guide Select a link below for information about the Radiographer's screens and tabs. Main Menu Patient Query Patient Work List Screen Patient Input Screen More Image Data Tab More Information Tab Image Review Screen Multi-format Configuration Screen Image Viewer Screen Image Adjustment Tab Markers Tab Surround Mask Tab View Modification Tab Crop Box Adjustment Tab Print Tab Magnification Tab Comment Tab


28/454

5/22/2018


CR System Overviews

CR System Software Overview KODAK DIRECTVIEW EVP Plus Software (option) is a multi-frequency rendering algorithm. It

provides an image processing method that lets the system parameters provide independent control of fundamental image quality attributes such as: •

brightness latitude

detail contrast

sharpness

noise suppression

•

•

•

•

KODAK DIRECTVIEW Image Processing Software is available for systems that do not purchase the EVP option. This default software option provides you with less control of the image processing features and allows only one View to choose from in the Image Processing Preference Editor. Contact your sales representative for more information. See also:

Brightness, Latitude, and Detail Contrast Reducing Noise in an Image


29/454

5/22/2018



CR Modality Overview The DIRECTVIEW CR (Computed Radiography) product family consists of a series of medical scanners utilizing phosphor screen technology to produce diagnostic quality images. The different product members offer a variety of performances and functional capabilities to meet the demands of a range of large centralized sites to small clinics. Each scanner allows the radiographer to input the required data manually or interface with the site's HIS/RIS to retrieve patient information. Using the device's User Interface, the radiographer can verify proper image placement and check for motion prior to routing images to printers or store devices. The products can communicate with other medical devices, specifically store devices and printers, that support the DICOM 3 standard. The products support a number of add-on options that allow extended functionality, such as advanced image processing, ability to perform long-length imaging, image reject analysis, and various workflow enhancements. The products also support the use of the optional Total Quality Tool (TQT) as a means to verify the integrity of the image acquisition and erase sub-systems and the individual cassettes. In addition, the CR System provides a Remote Operations Panel (ROP) that can be used to interact with the product. This remote workstation allows control of certain CR System functions from a remote location. See also:

What is TQT? Remote Workstation Options Scanning on a Classic/Elite CR System Scanning on a CR 825/850 System Scanning on a CR 950/975 System


30/454

5/22/2018


CR System Overviews

Brightness, Latitude, and Detail Contrast Definitions The radiographer may adjust three powerful parameters to fine-tune image quality.

•

Brightness makes an image lighter or darker.

•

Latitude the number of shades of gray visible the image. IncreasingYou the may latitude increases controls the number of gray levels, making blacks andinwhites less apparent. want to

increase the latitude if important anatomical information is in the black or white region of the image and it cannot be visualized.

•

Detail Contrast controls the local contrast of medium-sized structures such as joint spaces,

vertebral body spacings, and ribs in the image. Increasing detail contrast makes anatomical features more pronounced. See also:

Using the Image Viewer Screen Using the Image Adjustment Tab Adjusting Image Parameters Viewing More Detail Adjusting Image Quality Controls Low Contrast Images Increasing Latitude Using the Histogram Reprocessing an Image How to Use Window and Level


31/454

5/22/2018



32/454

5/22/2018


Scheduled Workflow

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Display Configuration Workflow Configurations A Key Operator configures the System workflow to organize the way images are foldered at the workstation. To set-up this configuration, go to Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Display Configuration. Select the Patient Input Tab. You can select the radio button to configure your system with one of two ways to identify images: Image Identifier

Result

Select Create new procedure steps from Patient Input to keep the same Study Instance Unique Identifier

Create new procedure steps from the Patient Input Screen.

(SIUID)This places the images into the same study. Select Create new Studies from Patient Input to generate a new Study Instance Unique Identifier (SIUID) and a new Procedure Step.

Create new studies from the Patient Input Screen.

Scheduled Workflow is an option that may be used with either of the workflow configurations

listed above. Your system may be configured for either mode for Integrated Healthcare Enterprise (IHE) compliance. See also:

MPPS Mode


33/454

5/22/2018



Modality Performed Procedure Step (MPPS) MPPS is an element of the optional Scheduled Workflow software feature. The MPPS feature

communicates with the Modality Performed Procedure Step Manager every time a procedure starts, ends, or is discontinued using the appropriate button on the Patient Input Screen. The Modality Performed Step Manager is responsible for updating the PACS system with the information sent Procedure by the CR System. The Key Operator selects the "Send scheduled workflow MPPS command" option on the HIS/RIS Polling & Remote Query Screen. See also:

Using the Patient Input Screen HIS/RIS Configuration HIS/RIS Polling Query


34/454

5/22/2018


Scheduled Workflow

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Scheduled Workflow Configuration Scheduled Workflow Configurations Scheduled Workflow provides automatic notification of exam status to the HIS, reducing the

steps necessary to complete the exam. It provides consistency for ordering patient images, and defines schedules and imaging acquisition procedures. Select the following check boxes to configure your system with one or more of the following conditions:

Setting the Procedure Steps to Complete Select the check box to configure Scheduled Workflow so that a study is automatically set to Complete when all images are accepted.

Display End Procedure Step Confirmation Dialog Box Select the check box to configure an End Study prompt when all images are accepted.


35/454

5/22/2018



36/454

5/22/2018


Scanning Equipment and Procedures Scanning CR Cassettes Menu Scanning on the Classic/Elite CR System Scanning on the CR 825/850 System Scanning on the CR 950/975 System High-Resolution Scanning Scanner Error Slow System Response CR System Freeze-up


37/454

5/22/2018



Using the Touch-Screen When you are logged on, the Main Menu appears on the touch-screen. To select a menu choice, select the center of the button. Selecting the edge of the button may give you unexpected results. Use only your finger or mouse to select buttons on the screen. Other objects can damage the surface of the touch-screen. The touch-screen automatically shuts off or goes to "sleep" if it is not used for a certain length of time. Select the screen to reactivate it. The basic Classic CR system is shipped with a flat panel, non-touch screen monitor. A touch screen monitor is available as an upgrade on a Classic CR system.


38/454

5/22/2018


Scanning Equipment and Procedures

High-Resolution Scanning

•

•

High-Resolution scanning produces diagnostic quality images with 97 micron spacing between pixels. The bar-code on the cassette tells the CR System that a GP Plus Cassette is inserted, and the scan rate changes to 97 microns.

GP Plus Scan Mode, available worldwide, produces high-resolution images with KODAK GP Plus cassettes.

If the scanner does not recognize the bar-code, manually specify the cassette type.

•

What Are Scan Modes? Scan Modes are unique to the Classic/Elite CR Systems. Scan Modes affect large cassettes such as 35 x 35 cm and 35 x 43 cm. You can set three scan modes from the Local User Interface (not from the Console): Standard Speed Mode: High Resolution High Speed Mode: Standard Resolution

This mode scans in the least amount of time. Reduced Border: Images on 35 x 35 cm and 35 x 43 cm cassettes are captured with pixel

sizes of 171 microns rather than 168 microns. The scanned image area increases slightly, producing borders smaller than those produced on other systems. See also:

Scanning CR Cassettes What do I do if I receive an error while scanning? Scanning on the Classic/Elite CR System Scanning on a CR 825/850 System Scanning on a CR 950/975 System Automatic delivery vs manual delivery


39/454

5/22/2018



Scan Status

Slow System Response Slow System Response means a long wait between screen changes or a long wait before data

appears on the screen. Resolving this may require a system reboot. The CR System may require a weekly reboot, and in cases of high cassette throughput, you may need to reboot more often. See also:

Restarting Versus Rebooting Shutting Down the CR System


40/454

5/22/2018



CR System Freeze-up If it is not possible to reboot the CR System using normal Shutdown procedures, it may be necessary to manually reboot the System. 1. Select and quickly release the computer's Power button. 2. Wait 30 seconds. 3. Turn the computer back on. If the power down sequence still does not initiate:

1. Select and hold the computer's Power button. 2. Wait 10 seconds. 3. Reinitiate the UPS system. Use the computer's Power button to turn the computer back on if there is no UPS system. If the Remote Operations Panel (ROP) won't respond:

1. Select the Quick Menu/Shutdown button to reboot the ROP. 2. If the Shutdown button is not available: 3. Turn Off the Power button located under the ROP's front panel. 4. Wait 10 seconds and turn the ROP back on. See also:

How to Logon, Log Out Shutting Down the CR System Restarting Versus Rebooting Using the Shutdown button


41/454

5/22/2018



Scanning on a Classic/Elite CR System

Loading a Cassette The cassette feed slot lets you insert a single cassette manually. 1. Hold the cassette with the yellow corner facing up and toward you. 2. Place the cassette in the feed slot with the tube side facing to the right. 3. Push the cassette into the slot. The CR System beeps once when it reads the cassette bar-code label. 4. Push the cassette all the way to the back until the CR System beeps twice, signaling that you can let go of the cassette. After the cassette has been scanned, the CR system releases it, and displays the Remove Cassette message on the Local User Interface. 5. Manually remove the cassette. Make sure that the Tube Side label faces to the right, and the cassette's yellow corner is always up and towards you. See also:

Auto-Associating Information Local User Interface Main Menu


42/454

5/22/2018



Scanning on a CR 825/850 System

Loading a Cassette 1. Slide the cassette into the front of the cassette feed slot at the top of the CR 825/850 System. When you insert the cassette into the CR 825/850 System, the cassette is pulled into scan position and scanning starts immediately. After the cassette has been scanned, the system releases it automatically. 2. Remove the cassette from the cassette feed slot. Make sure that the tube side label faces to the right, and the cassette’s yellow corner is always up and towards you. When the CR System scans the phosphor screen, it erases any residual image before it places the phosphor screen back into the cassette for re-use. See also:

CR System Freeze-up What Is High Resolution Scanning? Scanning CR Cassettes Slow System Response Scanner Error Auto-Associating Information


43/454

5/22/2018



Scanning on a CR 950/975 System

Loading Cassettes 1 Place exposed cassettes on the right side of the feed slot. 1. Push a cassette all the way into one of the drive belt slots. 2. Set the cassette into the transport mechanism. 3. Make sure the cassette is perpendicular when loaded and pushed all the way to the back of the slot. You can load up to eight cassettes of all sizes at one time.

2 Start scanning when the Start button turns green. 1. Press the green Start button to begin scanning.

The Start button turns orange while scanning.

When the cassette reaches the feed slot, the phosphor screen is extracted and scanning starts immediately.

When scanning is complete, the screen is erased and re-inserted into the cassette.

The cassette moves to the left as the next cassette reaches the feed slot.

•

•

•

•

2.

You can now remove the cassette and reuse it.

3 Select the Start button to pause the transport. When the system is paused, the Start button turns white. •

•

Remove any completed cassettes from the left so that scanning can continue.

Make sure that the tube side label faces to the right, and the cassette’s yellow corner is always up and towards you.


44/454

5/22/2018



When the CR System scans the phosphor screen, it erases any residual image before it places the phosphor screen back into the cassette for re-use. Place exposed STAT cassettes in the second slot to the right of the center process slot. If there is already a cassette in the second slot, remove it first. Do not load or remove cassettes from Slot 1.

The CR 950/975 has moving parts. Avoid contact with the belt. See also:

CR System Freeze-up High-Resolution Scanning Scanner Error Slow System Response


45/454

5/22/2018



Purchasing Erase Lamps Order new erase lamps from Carestream Health, Inc. Customer Support. The erase lamps are sold in pairs. Customer Support (US and Canada)

1-866-927-1018 PN 7E9471 The part name to ask for is CR Erase Lamp Bulb. Elsewhere in the world, contact Carestream Health Inc. in your country. CARESTREAM HEALTH, INC. 150 Verona Street Rochester, N.Y. 14608


46/454

5/22/2018


Logging and Shutdown Procedures Logging On and Logging Out of the Modality To logon to the Modality:

1. Select the User Name field and type in your user name. 2. Select the Password field and type in your password. 3. Select Logon. The Security Administrator determines what your log on information is. If your system is configured without user names and passwords, select the Logon Tech button. If you forgot your password:

Contact your Security Administrator for logon information.

Your Security Administrator can reset your password.

•

•

Your Security Administrator can configure your system so that user names and passwords are not required. To log out of the Modality:

1. Select the Quick Menu button (left most button on the bottom of the screen) to bring up the menu. 2. Select the Logout button. See also:

Shutting Down the CR System Restarting Versus Rebooting Using the Shutdown Button


47/454

5/22/2018



Shutting Down the CR System Select the blue link below to for instructions on how to shut down the CR 825/850/950/975 System.

CR 825/850/950/975 System To turn off the CR System:

1. Select the Quick Menu button

, the lower left button on any CR System screen.

2. Select the Shutdown button. 3. On the Shutdown screen, select the appropriate radio button:

Restart: restarts the interface without turning off the machine.

Reboot: turns off and resets the machine.

Shutdown/Power Off: turns off all power to the machine and the interface.

•

•

•

4. Select OK. The UPS shuts down up to one minute after the KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR Software and MICROSOFT WINDOWS Operating System shut down.

Select the blue link below to for instructions on how to shut down the Classic/Elite CR System.

Classic/Elite CR System To turn off the CR System:

1.

At the Main Menu, select the Quick Start Menu button.


48/454

5/22/2018


Logging and Shutdown Procedures

2. Select System Shutdown/Power Off and select OK. The CR computer shuts down. 3. Turn off the power switch on the side of the Classic/Elite CR System.


49/454

5/22/2018



Restarting Versus Rebooting

To Restart means to turn the software off and on without affecting the System computer.

To Reboot the system means to turn off and reinitialize the System.

•

•


50/454

5/22/2018


Logging and Shutdown Procedures

Using the Shutdown Button The Shutdown button is located in the lower left corner of every screen as part of the Quick Menu. The Shutdown button displays different options depending on the logon password used. For example, Service personnel see different options than radiographers. 1. At the Main Menu, select the Quick Menu button. 2. Select the Shutdown button. The System Shutdown Menu of radio buttons appears:

Join Capture Link Server after Restart

Restart

Reboot

Shutdown/Power Off

•

•

•

•

For the CR 825/850/950/975 System, selecting Shutdown/Power Off turns off all power to the machine and the interface.

o

For the Classic/Elite CR System, selecting Shutdown/Power Off shuts down the CR System computer.

o

3. Select the appropriate action on the System Shutdown Menu. 4. Select OK. 5. For the Classic/Elite CR System, turn off the power switch on the side of the machine. See also:

Restarting Versus Rebooting Shutting Down the CR System How to Log On and Log Out


51/454

5/22/2018



52/454

5/22/2018


Scan Status Screen Patient Information Bar The Patient Information Bar appears at the bottom of every image in the Image Viewer Screen. It provides the current patient information for the displayed image.

•

When selected, it opens the patient record on the Patient Input Screen.

The information on the Patient Information Bar includes:

Patient Name

Patient ID

•

•

Accession number

•

•

Cassette ID

Exposure Index Date/Time

•

•

Tech ID

View Name

•

•

You can select the previous image or the next image in the study by selecting the arrows on the Patient Information Bar. The Patient Information Bar changes colors depending on the status of the image. For example, the bar may be green for an image that is assigned, and orange for an image that is unassigned. See also:

Using the Patient Input Screen Using the Image Viewer Screen Using the Scan Status Screen


53/454

5/22/2018



Using the Erase Cassette Tab 1. Select the Erase Cassette Tab on the CR 825/850/950/975 system to place the system automatically into the Erase Mode. Make sure that you want to erase a cassette! The system cannot scan a cassette with an image while in Erase Mode. For the Classic/Elite CR Systems, use the Erase button on the Local User Interface. Erasing deletes any image on the phosphor screen. 2. Insert the cassette into the CR System. Select the Erase Cassette button for the CR 950/975' The phosphor screen is removed from the cassette, and erased from the screen. The screen is replaced in the cassette for use with another exam. The mechanical Start button on the front of the CR 950/975 is not active during Erase Mode. Use the Erase Cassette function to erase a phosphor screen if the cassette has not been used within 24 hours or if you suspect it has been exposed to any X-ray radiation. Do not insert cassettes containing patient images into the CR 950/975 System while it is erasing cassettes. See also:

Using the Scan Status Screen


54/454

5/22/2018


Scan Status Screen

Using the Erase Lamp Status Tab The Erase Lamp Status Tab on the CR 825/850/950/975 system notifies you when one or more pairs of erase lamps are not functioning. For Classic/Elite CR Systems, the Erase Lamp Status appears only on the Local User Interface. When two pairs of lamps stop functioning, a warning appears and scanning is stopped. You must replace the lamps. See the KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR Systems Hardware Guide for instructions on replacing the lamps. See also:

Purchasing Erase Lamps


55/454

5/22/2018




Displays the last scanned image

Erases cassettes

•

•

•

Resolves cassette transport problems such as cassette jams Provides erase lamp status

•

CR 825/850/950/975 Systems The Scan Status Screen appears with the following Tabs/functions on the CR 825, CR 850, CR 950, and CR 975 Systems. Scan Status Tab

Displays the last scanned image. From this tab you can assign the image, access the Patient Input Screen and the Image Viewer Screen. The Pause Pass-through button is active if Passthrough mode is configured, allowing inspection

Erase Cassette Tab

of images before delivery. Erases cassettes that have become exposed to ambient radiation. Cassettes that have not been used in 24 hours should be erased prior to use.

System Recovery Tab

Resolves cassette transport problems such as cassette jams.

Erase Lamp Tab

Displays the Erase Lamp Status. System warnings occur when one or more pairs of erase lamps are not functioning.

Classic/Elite CR Systems Only the Scan Status Tab is available on the Console of the Classic/Elite CR Systems. The Erase Cassette Tab, System Recovery Tab, and Erase Lamp Tab functions are available on the Local User Interface of the Classic/Elite CR Systems.


56/454

5/22/2018


Scan Status Screen

See also:

Local User Interface Main Menu Using the Scan Status Tab Using the Erase Cassette Tab Using the Scan Status Tab Using the System Recovery Tab Using the Erase Lamp Status Tab


57/454

5/22/2018



Using the Scan Status Tab Displays the status of image acquisition. Progress bar

Displays the progress of the scan from start to completion.

Pause through/ResumePassPass-through functions

If the Key Operator configures the system for Pass-through Mode , these buttons appear. They allow you to inspect an image before accepting and sending to destinations, and then resume Pass-through Mode.

Image Viewer Screen

Opens the Image Viewer Screen to modify the image quality.

Assign Image

Opens the Patient Query screen to assign patient information to the image.

Patient Bar

Opens the Patient Input Screen to view or change patient information.

Information

Patient Record

Opens the Patient Input Screen to observe or change patient information.

The Scan Status Tab displays on all CR Systems. See also:

Using the Scan Status Screen Using the Image Viewer Screen Assigning an Image Patient Information Bar Pass-through Mode Using the Patient Input Screen


58/454

5/22/2018


Scan Status Screen

Using the System Recovery Tab To release cassettes that are not transporting properly:

1. Select Clear Cassette Jam to reverse the movement of the transport mechanism. 2. Select Release Cassette to move the cassette to the home position. 3. If the cassette is released, remove the cassette. If the problem persists, call your Service Representative. See also:



59/454

5/22/2018



60/454

5/22/2018


Cassettes, Troubleshooting, and Error Messages Local User Interface Scan Status

Cassette Jams CR 825/850/950/975 Systems If a cassette jam occurs when you are using the CR 825/850/950/975 Systems, open and close the front door of the CR System. This resets the CR System hardware and clears most cassette jams. If the cassette fails to release, do the following:

1. At the Main Menu, select Scan Status. 2. Select System Recovery. 3. Select Clear Cassette Jam to reverse the movement of the transport mechanism. 4. Select Release Cassette to move the cassette to the "home" position. 5. If the cassette is released, remove the cassette. 6. If the problem persists, call your Service Representative.

Classic/Elite CR Systems 1. Select the Local User Interface Utilities menu. 2. Select System Recovery. 3. Select Cassette Jams. See also:

Local User Interface Main Menu Using the System Recovery Tab


61/454

5/22/2018



Scan Status

Scanner Error If you receive an error on the CR screen while scanning a cassette, make sure that the cassette is inserted properly and follow the instructions on the screen. See also:

Cassette Jams Scanning CR Cassettes Resolving a Cassette ID Error


62/454

5/22/2018


Cassettes, Troubleshooting, and Error Messages

Scanning CR Cassettes Menu Scanning on the Classic/Elite CR System Scanning on the CR 825/850 System Scanning on the CR 950/975 System High-Resolution Scanning Scanner Error Slow System Response CR System Freeze-up


63/454

5/22/2018



Resolving Cassette ID Errors If you see the error Cassette ID Bar-code Read Failed, it means that the internal bar-code scanner cannot read the cassette bar-code label. The cause is most often a degraded bar-code label, not an issue with the equipment. •

Select cancel from the dialog box to eject the cassette and try to reinsert the cassette. or Select the cassette type/size from the dialog box.

•

Contact Service to repair the bar-code label.

If a duplicate Cassette ID is entered:

You will receive a warning message and must choose one of the following:

Select Cancel New Image Information to use a different cassette for the exam.

Select Cancel Old Image Information to remove the cassette ID from the unacquired image in the previous study.

•

•

If the Cassette ID field turns red:

•

The field turns red if the cassette ID is invalid. A valid cassette ID is a 10 digit number that begins with the number 9.

See also:

Using the Patient Input Screen


64/454

5/22/2018


Bar-Code Scanner Entering Information with the Bar-Code Scanner You can populate ANY field in the Modality using the bar-code scanner. Select a data field and scan a bar-code to place its value in the field. The system is capable of recognizing and automatically placing the values. This feature is the system's ability to automatically recognize certain data fields and enter the information without selecting that field in advance. The Modality and the Bar-Code Scanner can:

•

Expedite data entry by reading bar-codes for selected fields and place those values into the fields.

Automatically place the correct value in the correct field if you read an accession number or

•

Patient ID and the patient exam is opened automatically. This includes: Accession #

•

Patient ID

Procedure Code

Cassette ID

Tech ID

•

•

•

•

Automatically executes a local query to retrieve Work List or patient records that match the value

•

read. See also:

Information Does Not Appear Where Can I Use the Bar-Code Scanner?


65/454

5/22/2018



Information Does Not Appear Why doesn't the information appear when I use the bar-code scanner?

If the bar-code scanner beeps, it has read the bar-code successfully. If the information does not appear orKey doesOperator not appear onthe thebar-code screen, the bar-code scanner must be re-configured. The canproperly configure scanner. Bar-Code Configuration Menu If there is no beep, check to see if there is a:

Hardware problem

Unreadable bar-code (it if it is due to a blurred bar-code, move the bar-code scanner closer or farther away from the bar-code label as you scan)

Invalid bar-code

•

•

•

To determine if the bar-code scanner is functioning:

1. Press the trigger (if in manual trigger mode) while aiming the scanner at a sheet of paper. 2. Look for the red scanning beam. If you can see the red scanning beam, the device is working.


66/454

5/22/2018


Bar-Code Scanner

Where Can I Use the Bar-Code Scanner? You can use the bar-code scanner on any of the following screens to go to the Patient Input Screen. Main Menu Screen Patient Query Screen Patient Input Screen Image List Screen See also:

Entering Information with the Bar-Code Scanner


67/454

5/22/2018



68/454

5/22/2018


CR System Exams

Beginning a Patient Exam To begin an exam from manual input:

1. Select the New Patient button from the Main Menu Screen. 2. Use the bar-code scanner to enter the patient information, or select the field and enter the patient information by using the keyboard. Highlighted fields are required fields and must be completed. 3. Select Save Changes. To begin an exam for a patient already in the system:

1. Select Study Data from the Main Menu. 2. Enter search criteria such as the accession number or the first few letters of the patient's last name. 3. Select Find Study Locally. The Patient Input Screen opens if there is an exact match. 3. Select the patient name from the Work List if multiple entries are found. 4. The patient information fills in automatically on the Patient Input Screen. 5. Enter additional information if necessary. 6. Save Changes after entering the patient information. To begin an exam from the HIS/RIS:

1. Select Study Data from the Main Menu. 2. Enter search criteria such as the accession number or the first few letters of the patient's last name. 3. Select Find Study Locally. 4. Select Find Study Remotely if using Find Study Locally does not retrieve the patient record. Find Study Remotely sends a request to the HIS/RIS for the patient record.

5. The Patient Input Screen opens if there is an exact match. 6. Select the patient name from the Work List if multiple entries are found. 7. The patient information fills in automatically on the Patient Input Screen. 8. Enter additional information if necessary. 9. Save Changes after entering the patient information. To enter data from the Remote Patient Data Entry System:

The connection lets you access the Patient Input Screen to pre-populate the Work List. When the Remote Patient Data Entry option has been enabled, the Remote Access Software lets you access the Patient Input Screen to pre-populate the Work List. See also: 53 http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/koda k-c r-topic s-sof t-ve r-52

69/454

5/22/2018



Using the Patient Query Screen Using the Patient Input Screen Using the More Image Data Tab Using the More Information Tab


70/454

5/22/2018


Radiographer's Software

Completing an Exam Set-up Setting up Views for My Study: To complete the setup of an exam without the optional Procedure Mapping:

1. Select the Add View button. 2. Select a region from the Primary Category Tab. 3. Select a body part from the Secondary Category Tab. 4. Select all of the desired Views for the study. 5. Select Save Changes. 6. Enter information on the More Information and More Image Data Tabs if needed. To complete an exam from the HIS/RIS with optional Procedure Mapping:

If your facility has a HIS/RIS and your modality has the optional Procedure Mapping feature, the Key Operator can associate procedure codes to automatically populate the necessary views for a study. The HIS/RIS must populate the procedure code field on the Patient Input Screen in order for the Views to automatically populate. 1. From the Main Menu, select Study Data. 2. Search for the patient using the Patient Query Screen. 3. Select the patient from the Patient Work List. The patient information and the Views for the procedure automatically appear on the Patient Input Screen. Enter information on the More Information and More Image Data Tabs if needed. To complete an exam from optional Procedure Mapping without the HIS/RIS:

If your facility has purchased the optional Procedure Mapping feature, you can complete the View selection process as follows: 1. From the Main Menu, select New Patient. 2. Manually enter the patient data and complete all of the highlighted required fields. 3. Select Procedure Name. Steps 3-6 are not required if you know the procedure code. Enter the procedure Code in the Procedure Code field and select Enter. The system automatically enters the procedure name in the Procedure Name field and the associated Views automatically appear. 4. Select a region from the Primary Category Tab. 5. Select a body part from the Secondary Category Tab. 6. Select a Procedure. The views for the procedure appear on the Patient Input Screen automatically. 7. Enter information on the More Information and More Image Data Tabs if needed. See also:


71/454

5/22/2018



Using the More Image Data Tab Using the More Information Tab


72/454

5/22/2018



Setting Up Views for My Procedure The following workflows let you enter procedure information quickly on the Patient Input Screen:

Using the Add View Workflow 1. Manually enter required information in highlighted fields with the virtual keyboard, or use the bar-code scanner. Required fields must be completed before you proceed with the exam. 2. Enter optional information, if available. Optional fields are not highlighted and do not have to be filled in order to complete the exam. The Key Operator determines which fields are considered optional. 3. Select the Procedure Name field if this field is not populated from the RIS. After selecting the field, use the keyboard tab to manually name the procedure. The procedure then appears on the Work List. 4. Select Add View. 5. Select a region from the Primary Category; select a body part from the Secondary Category. 6. Select all of the views in the study. 7. Enter information on the More Information and More Image Data tabs if needed. 8. Select Save Changes.

Using the Procedure Name Workflow If your facility has the optional Procedure Mapping feature, you can automate the View selection process as follows: 1. Select the Procedure Name field from the Patient Input Screen. 2. Select a region from the Primary Category. 3. Select a body part from the Secondary Category. 4. Select a Procedure. The views for the procedure appear on the Patient Input Screen automatically.

Using the Automated Procedure Code Mapping Workflow If your facility has a HIS/RIS with the optional Procedure Mapping feature, the Key Operator can associate hospital codes that represent procedures with the data entry on the CR or DR System. When the patient information is selected from the Patient List, the codes are included in the list. The Views for that procedure appear automatically on the Patient Input Screen. 1. From the Main Menu, select Study Data. 2. Search for the patient using the Patient Query Screen. You can type in the first letter of the name to view the list. 3. Select the patient from the Patient List. The patient information and the Views for the procedure automatically appear on the Patient Input Screen.


73/454

5/22/2018



See also:

Defining a View Deleting a View Changing the View Name


74/454

5/22/2018



Accepting the Image Select the Accept Image button or the Accept All button when the image is suitable to be sent to a destination. Make sure that:

The patient was still and there is no motion visible in the image.

You can see the Region of Interest clearly.

The image is properly oriented for viewing and printing.

Markers and annotations are properly located.

•

•

•

•

Accepting the image sends the image to the printer or PACS workstation configured by the Key Operator. See also:

Adjusting Image Parameters Correcting Image Artifacts Adjusting Image Quality Controls Flagging an Image


75/454

5/22/2018



Correcting Image Artifacts How do I prevent black or white lines from recurring in my image?

Make sure that the phosphor screens and cassettes are clean. Always follow the manufacturer's instructions when cleaning screens and cassettes.

Make sure that the CR room and CR System are kept clean and free of dust.

•

•

If the lines do not disappear after cleaning, call Service. What do I do if the cassette stickers appear in the image?

Verify that stickers are on the reverse side of the cassette and that the cassette is exposed tube-side up. What do I do if the phosphor screen is damaged?

Replace the phosphor screen.


76/454

5/22/2018



Modifying a Delivered Image Modifying a delivered image means that you want to change the image processing, add a marker, or otherwise change the image that has been accepted and delivered to destinations such as a printer or a PACS workstation. In order to modify a delivered image, you must first createway. a copy of the image and then modify the copy. A delivered image cannot be altered any other 1. Search for a delivered image on the Patient Input Screen or Image List Screen. 2. Select the image. The Image Viewer Screen appears. 3. Select the Create Copy of Image button. 4. Modify the copy using the tools on the Image Viewer Screen. 5. Select Save & Accept Image. See also:

Image List Screen Using the Image Viewer Screen Adjusting Image Parameters Reprocessing an Image


77/454

5/22/2018



Flagging an Image for Review If an image requires additional review, you can mark it and save it to a database for review later. From the Image Viewer Screen, do the following: 1. Select the Quick Menu in the lower left corner of the screen.

2. Select Flag for Review. 3. Select Save Changes. The image is saved for review by the Key Operator or by Service. The Key Operator views flagged images on the Flagged Image Screen. See also:

Harvesting Flagged Images Using the Image Viewer Screen


78/454

5/22/2018



Low Contrast Images due to IPL Parameters Failure If you see the message IPL Parameters failed, the system displays an unprocessed image. It may look too dark or too light, and is unusually low in contrast. You can adjust the image using the Window/Level tools. Before making adjustments, make sure that the correct View has been selected. An incorrect View could cause an Image Processing failure. If the View is correct, proceed with the adjustments. 1. Select Window/Level Mode on the Image Viewer Screen Image Adjustment Tab.

Raise the Window slider control to decrease contrast.

Lower the Window slider control to increase the contrast.

Raise the Level slider control to increase the brightness.

Lower the Level slider control to decrease brightness.

•

•

•

•

2. Select Save Changes and Save & Accept Image when adjustments are complete. This correction does not require reprocessing. See also:

How to Use Window and Level Image Processing Failure Brightness, Latitude, and Detail Contrast Definitions


79/454

5/22/2018



Rejecting an Image If you do not want to accept an image:

1. Select the Reject Image button. Administrative Reporting If themust system hasa the optional feature you select reason for rejection such as Analysis Motion orand Clipped Anatomy . installed,

2. Select the reason for rejecting the image. 3. Select Save Changes. If you select "Other" as a Reject reason, you must enter a Reject comment. The Key Operator determines how the system retains rejected images for further review. See also:

Accepting the Image Adjusting Image Parameters Remote Workstation Options


80/454

5/22/2018



Reviewing Images Once an image is acquired, you may want to review it in detail and possibly make changes before accepting it. Changes to images are made on the Image Viewer Screen. To review an acquired image:

1. Select the thumbnail image you would like to review from the Patient Input Screen. or From the Main Menu, select Image Review. The Image List Screen opens. 2. Select the thumbnail image you would like to review. The Image Viewer Screen opens. 3. In the Image Viewer Screen, select from the palettes of Image Adjustment, Masking, Markers, Printing, Orientation, Magnification, Look Adjustment, Crop Box Adjustment, Magnification, and Measurement Tools. There are Help screens for each of the palettes to explain the Image Viewer functions. On the Image Viewer Help Screen, select the icon of the function you wish to use to see information for that function. See also:

Using the Image Viewer Screen


81/454

5/22/2018



Adjusting Image Quality

Adjusting Image Parameters Menu If the image quality is not acceptable, make sure that you selected the correct View. Make sure you have the best image quality before making a diagnosis. Adjusting Image Quality Controls How to Use Window and Level Increasing Latitude Image Processing Failure Reprocessing the Image Using the Histogram Using the Image Adjustment Tab Using the Image Viewer Screen Viewing More Detail See also:

Changing the View Name Modifying a Delivered Image Viewing More Detail Low Contrast Images Increasing Latitude Reprocessing an Image Applying Automatic Masking Applying Manual Masking


82/454

5/22/2018



Adjusting Image Quality Controls

Brightness, Latitude, and Detail Contrast Definitions To change brightness:

Select the top arrow to raise the value and increase the brightness.

Select the bottom arrow to lower the value and decrease the brightness.

•

•

To change latitude:

Select the top arrow to raise the value and increase the latitude.

Select the bottom arrow to lower the value and decrease the latitude.

•

•

To change detail contrast:

Select the top arrow to increase the value and increase the contrast.

Select the bottom arrow to lower the value and lower the contrast.

•

•

To return to the last saved value of all of the slider controls:

1. Select Reset. 2. Select Save Changes when finished making changes. 3. Select Save & Accept Image to send the image to destinations. See also:

Viewing More Detail Using the Image Viewer Screen Accept Image Button


83/454

5/22/2018



How to Use Window/Level Use the Window/Level controls to change the brightness and contrast level when normal image processing fails or is unsatisfactory. 1. At the Window /Level Screen:

Raise the Window slider control to decrease contrast.

Lower the Window slider control to increase the contrast.

Raise the Level slider control to increase the brightness.

Lower the Level slider control to decrease brightness.

•

•

•

•

2. Select Save Changes.


84/454

5/22/2018



Increasing Latitude Latitude controls the number of shades of gray visible in the image. Increasing the latitude

increases the number of gray levels, making blacks and whites less apparent. You may want to increase the latitude if important anatomical information appears in the black or white region of the image and it cannot be visualized clearly. Increasing latitude:

Increases the number of gray levels

Decreases the apparent black and white values

•

•

See also:

Brightness, latitude, and detail contrast definitions Adjusting Image Parameters


85/454

5/22/2018



Image Processing Failure If image processing "fails" or does not perform on an image, the Modality will automatically revert to Window/Level Mode instead of the standard Image Viewer controls, allowing you to modify the contrast and brightness of the image. The image will appear unusually low in contrast. See also: How to Use Window and Level Low Contrast Images due to IPL Parameters Failure Reprocessing an Image Using the Histogram


86/454

5/22/2018



Reprocessing the Image Reprocessing modifies the image by applying the processing changes you have selected. It does not matter whether the changes were made through masking or View selection. Changing the mask alters the image data used by the image processing algorithms to do the image processing. Reprocessing an image resets the contrast, brightness, and latitude value to the defaults of the current View Name. When you change the View and select Reprocess Image, the image processing is performed again using the new image processing parameters for the new View. Reprocessing is an option that should only be used when you want to change the look of the image. Select the Reprocess Image button:

•

When you are not satisfied with the current look of the image.

When increasing or decreasing the size of the mask to the edge of the collimation. When masking out unneeded anatomy, to optimize on the visible anatomy.

•

•

When poor collimation leaves unwanted objects in the image. Edit the Surround Mask and reprocess to improve image quality.

When you modify the View Name.

•

•

You cannot reprocess an image if the image has been accepted and delivered across the network. You must create a copy of the image, modify the copy, and send it to the proper destinations. In addition, an image must be delivered before you can make a copy of it. When should I not reprocess an image?

Do not reprocess the image if visible collimation lines are desired. See also:

Modifying a Delivered Image


87/454

5/22/2018



Using the Histogram

•

The histogram is a graph of the distributions of pixel values in the image. The X-axis is exposure from low to high. The Y -axis is frequency of occurrence.

A normal exposure produces an S-shaped curve across the histogram. If image processing fails,

•

the histogram displays a straight diagonal line and the image displays very low contrast. This is an indication that no additional image processing has been applied to the image

•

In Window/Level Mode, the image is displayed without the additional image processing and the line on the histogram remains a straight diagonal line. It does not become an S-shaped curve.

. See also:

Using the Image Viewer Screen Image Processing Failure


88/454

5/22/2018



Using the Image Adjustment Tab You can make the following adjustments on the Image Adjustment Tab:

•

Brightness

•

Latitude Detail Contrast

Reset

Window/Level Mode

•

•

•

See also:

Brightness, Latitude, and Detail Contrast Definitions Low Contrast Images due to IPL Parameters Failure Increasing Latitude Using the Histogram Using the Image Viewer Screen Viewing More Detail


89/454

5/22/2018



Using the Image Viewer Screen On the Image Viewer Screen, any accessed image in the system appears before modification. Radiographers or Key Operators can perform any of the functions described on this page before sending an image to its destination. You can make any of the following changes: •

•

Review an image and decide to accept or reject it. Make adjustments to the image quality before sending the image to destinations.

Add markers, measurements, or comments to images.

•

•

Quickly review an image each time a thumbnail image is selected from anywhere in the system.

Image Viewer Palette Tabs Select an Image Viewer Palette Tab icon below for detailed instructions on using the Tab. Image Adjustment Tab (adding brightness, latitude, and detail

contrast) Markers Tab (adding, moving, and deleting markers)

Surround Mask Tab (applying, moving, and removing surround mask)

Adjustment Tab (changing views, applying suppression, inverting images, applying noise suppression.) View/Look

grid

Crop Box Adjustment Tab (printing True-size images, applying 1 cm

scale)

Print Tab (adding text boxes, rotating, flipping images)

Magnification Tab (pan and zoom)

Comments Tab (adding comments to the image using the keyboard)


90/454

5/22/2018



Measurement Tools (taking orthopedic measurements of distance,

angle, or Cobb angle) Quick Menu (logging out, shutting down, flagging images for review)

Make sure you select Save Changes before closing the Image Viewer Screen. See also:

Flagging an Image Additional Topics


91/454

5/22/2018



Adjusting for More Detail You can adjust the amount of detail visible in an image using the Image Quality adjustment. 1. On the Image Viewer Screen, select the View/Look Adjustment Tab. 2. incorrect Make sure thatcan the cause selected View is correct the the image you areimage reviewing. (Selecting an View unexpected resultsforfrom automatic processing). If the View is correct:

1. Select the Image Adjustment Tab. 2. Carefully adjust the brightness, latitude, and detail contrast slider controls to achieve the optimal appearance of the image. 3. Select Save Changes. If the View is not correct:

1. Select the View Name field on the View/Look Tab. 2. Select a new View Name from the View/Look Tab. 3. Select Reprocess. See also:

Adjusting Image Parameters Adjusting Image Quality Controls Low Contrast Images due to IPL Parameters Failure Increasing Latitude Using the Histogram Using the Image Viewer Screen Using the Image Adjustment Tab Reprocessing an Image How to Use Window and Level Flagging an Image What are Brightness, Latitude, and Detail Contrast?


92/454

5/22/2018



Assigning and Unassigning Images

Assigning an Image Assigning a View.

1. At the Main Menu, select the Images Not Assigned button. 2. Select the image from the list to open the Image Viewer Screen. 3. At the Image Viewer Screen, select the Look/Adjustment Tab. 4. Select the View Name field to correctly designate the appropriate body-part specific algorithm. 5. Select Reprocess Image. 6. Select Save Changes. Assigning an image to the Patient

1. Select Assign Image. Assign the image to a patient. 2. At the Patient Query Screen: Enter the search criteria to search for the correct patient. or Select New Patient. 3. Select Add View. If New Patient was selected, enter the patient information. 4. Select Save Changes. The image is assigned. The Patient Input Screen opens. See also:

Assigning an Image to a Different Patient How an Image Becomes Unassigned Unassigning an Image


93/454

5/22/2018



Assigning an Image to a Different Patient You can move an image from one patient to another by unassigning it from one patient and reassigning it to another. 1. Open the image to be moved from the Image Viewer Screen. 2. Select the Unassign Image button. 3. Select the Assign Image button. 4. At the Patient Query Screen: Enter the search criteria to select the correct patient or Select New Patient. 5. Select Add View. 6. If New Patient was selected, enter the patient information. 7. Save Changes. See also:

Using the Image Viewer Screen Assigning an Image Unassigning an Image


94/454

5/22/2018



How an Image Becomes Unassigned Unassigned images occur when:

•

The cassette is scanned without first associating the cassette with a patient, such as in a trauma situation.

A View icon is not selected when an image is scanned and the auto-associate feature is

•

enabled.

•

The image is manually unassigned from the original patient.

Unassigned images must be assigned to a patient before delivery. See also:

Assigning an Image Unassigning an Image Assigning an Image to a Different Patient


95/454

5/22/2018



Unassigning an Image To unassign an image from a patient ID or from a trauma ID:

1. Select the image to be unassigned. The image opens in the Image Viewer Screen. 2. Select Unassign Image. The patient information is removed from the image. The image information is retained with the image. See also:

Assigning an Image How an Image Becomes Unassigned Assigning an Image to a Different Patient


96/454

5/22/2018



Cropping Images

Using the Crop Box Adjustment Tab The Crop Box Adjustment Tab lets you change the way the image prints. To use the Crop Box Adjustment Tab:

•

Select the check box or button for the appropriate feature and select Save Changes. True Size

Prints the image True-size.

Manual Crop

Lets you adjust how much anatomy is displayed on the film. The area inside of the crop box determines what is displayed. You can drag the corners of the crop box to change the size of the box. Use the arrows to adjust the position of the crop box.

Best Fit

Rotates the image 90 degrees counter-clockwise to maximize film usage.

1 cm Scale

Displays and prints reference marks at 1 cm intervals to help you evaluate image size. The system places the scale on two adjacent sides of 1-up or a Multi-format print .

Crop Box Orientation

Changes the crop box from a lengthwise position to a crosswise position

Arrows

Moves the crop box to another part of the image as you select the arrows.


97/454

5/22/2018



See also:

Creating a True-size Print Using Manual Cropping Creating Multi-format Prints


98/454

5/22/2018



Using Manual Cropping Manual Cropping lets you adjust the amount of anatomy that is displayed on the film. The area

inside the crop box determines the display. The aspect ratio of the crop box depends on the film size selected. You can enlarge the crop box to include more anatomy, but it will reduce the magnification. 1. From the Main Menu, select Image Review. 2. Select an image to open the Image Viewer Screen. 3. Select the Crop Box Adjustment Tab. You can drag the edges of the crop box to change the size of the box, use the arrows to adjust the position of the crop box. 4. Select Save Changes.

See also:


99/454

5/22/2018



Using Manual Cropping on a Multi-format Print 1. Make sure that the image is included in a multi-format layout. If it is not, the cropping choices for multi-format will be grayed out. 2. Select one of the following: True-size Manual Crop Best Fit You can mix cropping selections from the 1-up and multi-format menus on the Crop Box Adjustment tab. For example, you can select True-size for 1-up and Manual Crop for the multiformat print. Both crop boxes are displayed.


100/454

5/22/2018



Delivering Images

Automatic Delivery or Manual Delivery The Key Operator, Applications Consultant, or Service Engineer configures the Modality for one of the following operating modes: Pass-through mode: all images are routed directly to destinations without inspection. •

QA mode: all images are inspected and approved before sending to destinations. Within QA mode, you can configure the system to automatically open an image in the Image Viewer Screen after it has been processed.

Auto QA by Image mode: the console automatically transfers from image acquisition to the Image Viewer Screen once the image is captured. You do not need to select the thumbnail to open the Image Viewer Screen. All images are inspected and approved before sending to

•

•

destinations.

•

QA by Study: all images in a study (DR Systems only) are manually inspected and approved

before sending to destinations. Select Accept Image to send the image to destinations. See also:

Unusable Image Viewing a Thumbnail Image QA by Image Mode Pass-through Mode


101/454

5/22/2018



Viewing a Thumbnail Image

•

Select the study from the Study List on the Patient Input Screen. The thumbnail images from that study appear across the bottom half of the screen.

To view an image that appears as a thumbnail: Select a thumbnail image to open it automatically in the Image Viewer . •

If you make changes to an image that require reprocessing, such as masking, orientation, or annotation with markers, the thumbnail image always reflects the saved changes. See also:



102/454

5/22/2018



Study Data Auto Display in QA Mode When you are operating in QA Mode, you can configure the system to automatically open an image in the Image Viewer Screen after the image is processed instead of selecting the image manually to inspect it. For the Key Operator to configure QA by Image Mode:

1. Select Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Delivery Preferences. 2. At the Delivery Preferences Screen, select Auto Display in QA Mode. 3. Select Save Changes. See also:

Automatic Delivery or Manual Delivery Pass-through Mode


103/454

5/22/2018



Pass-through Mode In Pass-through mode: all images are routed directly to destinations without inspection. When Pass-through mode is configured, you can select the Pause the Pass-through function on the Scan Status Screen to inspect an image. Select Resume Pass-through to continue scanning and to allow images to go to destinations without inspection. When the system distributes the image, you can recall the image for review at that time, if necessary. In QA mode, the radiographer must view and approve the image before distributing it across the network. See also:

QA Mode Automatic Delivery or Manual Delivery


104/454

5/22/2018



Auto Display in QA Mode If your system is configured for QA Mode, you must review and accept the image before distributing it to the selected destinations. You may choose to accept images individually following review of each, or all together after reviewing them all.

Acceptance by Image To review and accept individual images:

1. After acquisition, a thumbnail image appears on the Patient Input Screen. 2. Select the thumbnail image to display it for review on the Image Viewer Screen. 3. Select Accept Image to send the image to the appropriate network destinations.

Acceptance by Study To review and accept all images in the study:

1. After acquisition, thumbnail images appear on the Patient Input Screen. 2. Select one of the images to open the image on the Image Viewer Screen. 3. View the other thumbnail images using the arrow buttons to on the Patient Information Bar 4. Select the Patient Information Bar to return to the Patient Input Screen after reviewing all of the images. 5. Select Accept All to send all the images to the selected destinations. See also:

Destination Status Button


105/454

5/22/2018



Storage Commitment Function When you send an image to a destination, there is no guarantee that the image was stored to the hard drive. Sending the image means that the Modality transmitted the image to the PACS. With Storage Commitment enabled, a delivered image is successfully saved by the PACS and the Modality receives a confirmation that the image has been received and stored. The destination must support Storage Commitment for the Modality to use this feature. This feature is enabled by Service.


106/454

5/22/2018



Distributing Images

Sending Images to a Different Location 1. At the Image Viewer Screen, select Select Destination. 2. Select a different or additional destination from the screen. 3. Select the check box of the new destination. 4. Select Save Changes. 5. Select Back. 6. Select Accept to deliver the image to printers and workstations. You can only configure multiple copies for hard copy (printer) devices. See also:

Using the Image Viewer Screen Accepting the Image


107/454

5/22/2018



Distributing the Image Images can be sent to destinations:

•

Automatically, which can be configured by the Key Operator based on the Destination Profile

filters (Body Part, Physician, Cassette Size, etc).

•

Manually, by the radiographer selecting the destination using the Select Destination button.

See also:

Automatic Delivery or Manual Delivery Destination Status Button Change Destination Profile Button


108/454

5/22/2018



Entering and Deleting Data

Auto-Associating Information On the KODAK DIRECTVIEW Classic/Elite CR Systems and CR 825/850 Systems, the Key Operator can configurethe theneed machine to an automatically associate the Cassette Identity toThe a View icon, which eliminates to use external bar-code scanner for this purpose. Modality must be operating independently from a Remote Operations Panel (ROP). If a ROP is defined as an external device to one of the Modalities, the Auto-Associate button will not be enabled. Conversely, when Auto-Associate is enabled and a ROP is added, the Auto-Associate button will be disabled. To turn ON the Auto-Associate feature, go to Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Next Page > Scanner Options > and check the Auto-Associate Enabled check box. To initiate Auto-Associate from the Patient Input Screen:

1. Select a View. For an image to be auto-associated with a View, the desired View must be selected (highlighted)and displayed on the Patient Input Screen at the time of scanning until the barcode appears in the View icon. 2. Insert the cassette. When the cassette is scanned, the image is automatically associated with the View icon that was selected (highlighted) when the scan began. The system automatically highlights the next View after the cassette scanning process has started. 3. Insert the next cassette. 4. Repeat until each View is scanned. Each cassette will be associated automatically with the View that was selected when the cassette was inserted. Make sure that the View you want to scan is selected (highlighted) before inserting the cassette. If you do not select a View prior to inserting the cassette, an Unassigned Image will result. If a cassette is bar-coded accidentally, the information will not be used by the system if the Auto-Associate feature is enabled. The image file that is sent to other devices will contain the cassette ID of the cassette that was scanned, not the cassette ID that was accidentally read using the bar code scanner. See also:

Scanning on a Classic/Elite CR System Scanning on a CR 825/850 System Assigning an Image


109/454

5/22/2018



Creating an Additional Study Select the New Study button to create an additional study for the patient currently displayed on the Patient Input Screen.

The patient information is copied from the current study.

The Accession Number, Procedure Code, and Patient Location fields, among others, are left blank.

Both old and new studies appear in the study list on the right side of the Patient Input Screen.

•

•

•

See also:

Using the Patient Input Screen New Study Button Defining a View How to End a Study


110/454

5/22/2018



Displaying the Procedures List Both the Procedure Code field and the Procedure Name field contain the 3-tabbed Procedure Keyboards and the alphabetical keyboard. The Procedure Name field displays the Procedure Keyboard first. •

To display the Procedure List quickly, select the Procedure Name field.

See also:



111/454

5/22/2018



Displaying Other Studies for a Patient If a patient has other studies stored on the system, they are displayed as large rectangular icons in the lower right quadrant of the Patient Input Screen. Use the Up and Down arrows, if necessary, to display the full listing. Selecting an icon enters that study information into the Patient Input Screen. To display more than 10 images for a patient:

•

Use the Up and Down arrows located to the right of the image thumbnails to scroll the display of image icons when necessary. The current page number and total number of pages are displayed on the scroll bar .

See also:



112/454

5/22/2018



Displaying Image Icons Image icons on the Patient Input Screen may be displayed as gold tutor images, skeletal drawings, or in CR Systems, as cassette icons. The display configuration depends on the configuration chosen by the Key Operator. Tutor image

CR Cassette non-tube side (back)

CR Cassette image b tube side (front)

The CR Cassette non-tube side (back) is displayed when a View is automatically flipped (such as Chest-PA-Erect).

The CR Cassette tube side (front) is displayed when a view is not automatically flipped (such as Chest-AP-Erect).

•

•


113/454

5/22/2018



Modifying Information You can modify the patient, exam, and image data at any time up until the image is delivered. To modify information from the Patient Input Screen:

1. Select a field.

2. Select Backspace. 3. Enter the correct information from the keyboard. To modify information from the Patient Query Screen:

1. Select a field. 2. Select Backspace. or Select the Clear All Fields button on the bottom of the screen to delete information in all the fields. All fields that have pre-defined values will be reset to the default value when you select the Clear All Fields button. See also:

Using the Patient Input Screen Using the Patient Query Screen


114/454

5/22/2018



How to End a Study When all of the images have been acquired and accepted, you should end the study.

•

Select the End Study button on the Patient Input Screen.

Modality Performed Procedure Step (MPPS) If your system is using for Scheduled Workflow, selecting the End Study button sends a message to the HIS/RIS Modality Performed Procedure Step Manager that the procedure has ended, and changes the status of the exam in the Modality. See also:



115/454

5/22/2018



Entering Temporary Trauma Patient Data for Performing a Trauma Exam The Trauma button displays the pre-configured trauma patients that have been set up by the Key Operator. If your system is configured for the optional Trauma feature, the required fields on the Patient Input Screen populate quickly in emergency situations. To perform a Trauma exam: 1. Select Study Data. 2. Select Trauma from the Patient Query Screen. 3. Select an exam from the Trauma Tab. The default patient information and the selected exam information fills in automatically on the Patient Input Screen. Enter the actual patient information when it becomes available on the Patient Input Screen. If the image is delivered, you must unassign the image from the Trauma ID and assign the image to the correct patient information. See also:

Assigning an Image Assigning an Image to a Different Patient Using the Patient Input Screen


116/454

5/22/2018



Entering Additional Exam Information Additional exam information is information that the Key Operator has decided not to require in

order to proceed with the patient's exam. You can complete the patient's record with this information omitted. The fields are configurable by the Key Operator, depending on the need and on the layout selected by the facility. Enter optional information from the three tabbed palettes as shown below on the Patient Input Screen. The chart offers guidance for each category.

Exam Information Patient Last Name

Required

Patient First Name

Optional

Patient ID

Required

Gender

Male, Female, other

Date of Birth

Patient's date of birth

Patient Location

Room

Department Name

Select from user-defined list or enter from keyboard

Referring Physician

Select from user-defined list or enter from keyboard

Priority

Low, routine, urgent, STAT

Study Date

Entered automatically

Procedure Name

Select from tabbed palette, Thorax, Contrast Studies, Spine, Upper Extremity, Cranium, Abdomen, etc.

Procedure Code

Enter from keyboard

Accession Number

Enter from keyboard or bar-code

Tech ID

Read bar-code ID, select from user-defined list or enter from keyboard

More Information Patient Comments

Enter from keyboard

Contrast Agent

Enter from keyboard


117/454

5/22/2018



Enter from keyboard

Modality Step

Enter from keyboard

Requested Procedure Description

Enter from keyboard

Procedure ID

Enter from keyboard

Procedure Description

More Image Data Body Part

Enter from keyboard

View Position

Enter from keyboard

Patient Position

Enter from keyboard

Laterality

Enter from keyboard

Image Comments

Enter from keyboard

See also:

List Configuration


118/454

5/22/2018



Resolving Cassette ID Errors If you see the error Cassette ID Bar-code Read Failed, it means that the internal bar-code scanner cannot read the cassette bar-code label. The cause is most often a degraded bar-code label, not an issue with the equipment. •

Select cancel from the dialog box to eject the cassette and try to reinsert the cassette. or Select the cassette type/size from the dialog box.

•

Contact Service to repair the bar-code label.

If a duplicate Cassette ID is entered:

You will receive a warning message and must choose one of the following:

Select Cancel New Image Information to use a different cassette for the exam.

Select Cancel Old Image Information to remove the cassette ID from the unacquired image in the previous study.

•

•

If the Cassette ID field turns red:

•

The field turns red if the cassette ID is invalid. A valid cassette ID is a 10 digit number that begins with the number 9.

See also:



119/454

5/22/2018



Using the Patient Input Screen The Patient Input Screen has many functions. Image icons display when a scanned cassette is associated with a patient name. You can:

Enter Patient information

Perform Workflows

Display a patient study

Edit Patient information with the Editing Button

Review a selected image in the Image Viewer Screen

•

•

•

•

•

Accept an image and send it to destinations such as workstations or printers

•

To scan an image on the Patient Input Screen:

1. Create a study or select a View. The View icon is highlighted. 2. Scan the cassette. The progress of the scan is displayed in the thumbnail border. 3. The next unavailable View icon is automatically selected. If another View icon does not exist, the user may create another icon. Select a blue link from the list below for information about the Patient Input Screen.

Beginning a Patient Exam Completing an Exam Set-up Ending a Study Automated Procedure Code Mapping Displaying Image Icons Deleting Information Resolving a Cassette ID Error Using the More Image Data Tab Using the More Information Tab See also:

Auto-Associating Information Creating an Additional Study


120/454

5/22/2018



More Image Data The More Image Data Tab on the Patient Input Screen contains additional data elements that show how the image was acquired. The Key Operator can change the layout of this screen in Key Operator Functions > Layout Configuration > Patient Input You can change the patient, exam, and image data at any time up until the image is delivered. Use the keyboard to enter the following information, if available: kVp

Refers to peak kilo-volts used in the X-ray exposure

mAs

Milliampere seconds, derived by multiplying the milliampere by time. Controls the quantity of xradiation produced during an exposure.

Source to Image Distance (SID)

Enter the distance from the X-ray source to the center of the detector or cassette. This exposure information is needed for Long-Length Imaging and DR Systems.

Source to Patient Distance

Enter the distance from the X-ray source to the patient.

Image Comments

Enter comments concerning the image, such as "inspiration" or "10 minute image".

Patient Position

Enter the patient location.

The new feature is to let you edit image data after the image has been scanned and processed. To edit a processed image:

1. Select Edit Image Data. After scanning the image(s), the Patient Input Screen appears. 2. Select Edit Image Data. The button changes to Edit Is On. 3. Select a thumbnail image and then select any of the input tabs on the Patient Input Screen You will be in edit mode and can add or change selected fields of information. To end the edit mode:

Select the Edit Image Data a second time.

See also:



121/454

5/22/2018



Layout Configuration Determining the Exposure Index


122/454

5/22/2018



More Information The More Information tab on the Patient Input Screen contains additional patient information. Use the keyboard to enter the following information, if available: Referring Physician Patient Comments

Primary physician who referred patient. Comments the patient makes concerning his or her exam.

Procedure Description

The procedure step used in this study.

Step

Requested Procedure ID Requested Procedure Description

A code the RIS provides to identify a study. The name the RIS provides to identify a study.

See also:

Layout Configuration Using the Patient Input Screen


123/454

5/22/2018



Image Orientation and Appearance

Using the View/Look Adjustment Tab The View/Look Adjustment Tab lets you select a new View Name if the current View Name View Name assigned tosettings, the image is producing poor results. Each withwill it contrast brightness latitude and noise settings that determine what carries the image look like.and If the View Name is not assigned to the correct View, the results will be unsatisfactory. To change settings on the View/Look Adjustment Tab:

1. Select the View Name field if the current View is incorrect for the image and enter a new name. 2. Select the Invert Grayscale check box to display the black areas of the image as white and the white areas as black. This may be helpful when identifying line placements. 3. Select the Grid Suppression check box to suppress grid lines from the image. 4. Select the Noise Suppression check box to reduce the appearance of noise in low exposure areas.

See also:

Reducing Noise Using Grid Suppression Software Reversing the Image Using the Image Viewer Screen


124/454

5/22/2018



Reducing Noise Noise is density that appears in low exposure areas of an image. Noise is generally unwanted and can make it difficult to see important detail in an image. Noise Suppression Software can reduce or eliminate unwanted noise without adversely affecting the rest of the image. The Key Operator can configure this feature. Use Noise Suppression to reduce the amount of apparent noise in low exposure areas of the image. To apply noise suppression:

1. At the Image Viewer Screen, select the View/Look Adjustment Tab

.

2. Select the Noise Suppression check box. 3. Select Save Changes. •

This feature selectively applies a noise suppression algorithm to only those areas of the image with low exposure.

When you apply Noise Suppression, the improved low exposure areas appear clearer and smoother.

•

See also:

Using the View/Look Adjustment Tab Using the Image Viewer Screen


125/454

5/22/2018



Using Grid Suppression Software Grid Suppression Software is an optional feature that can detect the presence of a grid and

can suppress the visual effects of grid lines. The Key Operator can configure this feature. Use this feature to automatically suppress:

Visible grid artifacts on the monitor when viewing CR/DR images.

Moiré patterns when the image is minified and reduced line artifacts when the image is magnified.

•

•

To apply Grid Suppression:

1. At the Image Viewer Screen, select the View/Look Adjustment Tab

.

2. Select the Grid Suppression check box. 3. Select Save Changes. To remove Grid Suppression:

1. Clear the Grid Suppression check box. 2. Select Save Changes. See also:



126/454

5/22/2018



Magnification Tab The Magnification Tab lets you change the level of magnification you see in the image displayed in the Image Viewer window and move the view by selecting different points on the screen. To use the Magnification Tab:

1. Select the zoom level (200%, 100%, 50%, 25%). 2. Move the area of view by selecting the image, the thumbnail, or the arrows, or by dragging across the image. 3. Increase or decrease the magnification of the image for viewing on the Modality. 4. Select Fit to Screen:

To exit Pan and Zoom mode.

To make all areas of the image accessible for viewing.

•

•

Zoom Level is based on normal screen view. See also:



127/454

5/22/2018



Rotating and Flipping the Image Rotating and flipping the image lets you change the orientation of an image before it is sent to destinations. 1. From the Image Viewer Screen, select the Print Tab. 2. To rotate the image clockwise, select the Rotate CW button. To rotate the image counter clockwise, select the Rotate CCW button. The image rotates in increments of 90 degrees. You can see the change in the Image Viewer window. 3. To flip the image, select the Flip Horizontal or Flip Vertical button. You can see the change in the Image Viewer window. 4. Select Save Changes. The change you make to image orientation appears at the destination. See also:

Using the Print Tab Using the Multi-format Configuration Screen Printing an Image Using the Image Viewer Screen


128/454

5/22/2018



Reversing the Image At the Image Viewer Screen, select the Invert Grayscale check box.

•

The reversal image provides an alternate view of image detail. o

To print the image, select Save & Accept Image. To remove the effect, clear the Invert Grayscale check box.

o

See also:



129/454

5/22/2018



Using the Comment Tab The Comment Tab allows the radiographer or Key Operator to create a record of comments about the image. In addition, the Comment Tab lets you edit the laterality of an image after it is acquired. This is important if the image was flipped or rotated in the Image Viewer or if the laterality had not been noted elsewhere. 1. Select the Image Comments box. 2. Use the Keyboard to enter the comment. 3. Select Save Changes.

See also:



130/454

5/22/2018



Image Review Review Needed Status Occasionally, EVP Plus Software may not fully predict the parameters for an image. When this happens, it produces a Review Needed status. To use the Review Needed Status:

•

Check the contrast and brightness of the image.

For images with the Review Needed Status, you have access to the brightness, latitude, and detail contrast controls to correct the image in the Image Viewer Screen. Review Needed should not be confused with Need Approval, which is a status of images

which have not yet been approved and are waiting for destinations. Need Approval is located on the Image List Screen. See also:

Adjusting Image Quality Controls Brightness, Latitude, and Detail Contrast Definitions Using the Image List Screen Using the Image Viewer Screen


131/454

5/22/2018



Markers

Markers Menu Adding Markers Adding the Text Marker Moving a Marker Removing a Marker Using the Favorites Markers Using the Measures Markers Using the Others Markers Using the Time Markers


132/454

5/22/2018



Adding Markers You can add an unlimited number of markers to an image. Once a marker is added to an image, it will be visible when it is sent to a destination. 1. From the Image Viewer Screen, select the Markers Tab. 2. Select the type icon as indicated in the table below. 3. Select the desired location on the image. 4. Select Save Changes. Favorites Markers Group Others Markers Group Measures Markers Group Time Markers Group

User-created Markers Group

. The marker remains in place until you change its position. When you add a Free-Form Text marker, use the keyboard to enter text in the Free-form text field. You must select Enter every time the Free-Form text field is changed.


133/454

5/22/2018



See also:

How do I add a free-form text marker? Using the Markers Tab


134/454

5/22/2018



Adding the Text Marker The free-form text marker lets you add 32 characters of text to the image. You can add the text marker to an image or change the marker already in place. The text marker becomes part of the image and is retained when sent to destinations. To add a free-form text marker: 1. From the Image Viewer Screen, select the Markers Tab. 2. Enter the desired information in the Text field from the keyboard for your system. 3. Select the desired location on the image. To remove the text marker:

1. Select the Text marker on the image. 2. Select the trash can. See also:

Markers Menu Adding Markers Removing a Marker Using the Favorites Markers Using the Measures Markers Using the Others Markers Using the Time Markers


135/454

5/22/2018



Moving a Marker 1. Select the marker on the image. The marker is highlighted when selected. 2. Select a new location. See also: Markers Menu Adding Markers Adding the Text Marker Removing a Marker Using the Favorites Markers Using the Measures Markers Using the Others Markers Using the Time Markers


136/454

5/22/2018



Image Review Removing a Marker A marker can be removed from an image before or after it is saved to the Modality database. 1. Select a marker on the image. The marker is highlighted when selected. 2. Select the trash can. See also:

Markers Menu Adding Markers Using the Favorites Markers Using the Measures Markers Using the Others Markers Using the Time Markers Adding the Text Marker


137/454

5/22/2018



Image Review Using the Favorites Markers 1. Select Favorites by selecting the

icon.

2. Select a position marker such as Left or Right, and select the image to place the marker. 3. Select the arrow to apply an arrow marker. 4. Select the arrow again to change the direction of the arrow.

•

To delete a marker from the image, select the marker on the image and then select the trash can.

See also:

Adding the Text Marker Using the Others Markers Using the Time Markers Using the Measures Markers Markers Menu Adding Markers Removing a Marker


138/454

5/22/2018



Image Review Using the Measures Markers The Measures Markers include markers for different positions, including:

15°, 30°, 45°, 60°, and 90°

Semi-supine

Semi-erect

L Lat Decub

R Lat Decub

Oblique

MLO

CC

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

Scout Post Reduction

•

•

To use the Measures Markers:

To place a marker on the image, select the marker name on the palette and then select a point on the image to locate it.


•

•


139/454

5/22/2018



Image Review Using the Others Marker Group 1. Select Others by selecting the

icon.

2. Select a marker from the markers on the palette. 3. Select a point on the image to locate it. The Others Markers Group includes:

Flexion

Internal

Inspiration

Wt Bearing

•

•

•

•

Axial

•

Stress

Extension

External

Expiration

Post Contrast

Prelim

Erect

•

•

•

•

•

•

•


140/454

5/22/2018



•

To delete a marker from the image, select the marker on the image, then select the trash can.

See also:

Using the Favorites Markers Using the Time Markers Using the Measures Markers Markers Menu Adding Markers Adding the Text Marker Removing a Marker


141/454

5/22/2018



Image Review Using the Time Markers 1. Select the Time Markers by selecting the

icon.

2. Select the Time interval marker and select a point on the image to locate it. Time intervals include 15 and 30 seconds, 1 minute to 60 minutes, and 2 hours to 24 hours.

•


See also:

Using the Favorites Markers Using the Others Markers Using the Measures Markers Applying Markers Adding Markers Adding the Text Marker Removing a Marker


142/454

5/22/2018



Masking

Using the Surround Mask Tab Surround Mask causes the unexposed areas around the image to be displayed black and

makes soft tissue and low contrast the placement of collimator blades. detail more visible. Mask placement normally corresponds to

•

Make adjustments as desired. Show Mask

Applies Automatic Surround Mask and makes it visible.

Edit Mask

Applies Manual Surround Mask and adjusts the mask. Select the check box to apply.

Circle or Rectangle Controls

Locates where on the image the mask must be applied.

Arrows

Moves the mask shape you created to another area of the image.

Reset

Returns the mask to the last saved Surround Masking position.

Set to Corners

Places the mask points in the four corners of the image. Use this feature if there is a Surround Mask failure and you want to enlarge the mask quickly, or if you move a point off the image and you cannot get it back.

Single-Exposure Image

Overrides masking when the system interprets a single exposure as multiple images, or improperly masks multiple exposures on a single image. This feature can be configured in View Configuration to treat certain (or all) views always as single exposures.


143/454

5/22/2018



See also:

Masking Failure Applying Automatic Masking Mask Points Are Off the Screen Applying Manual Masking Reprocessing After Using a Mask


144/454

5/22/2018



Masking Failure When Automatic Surround Mask fails, apply Manual Surround Mask. See also:

Applying Manual Masking Mask Points Are Off the Screen Reprocessing After Using a Mask


145/454

5/22/2018



Applying Automatic Surround Mask (optional) Surround Mask reduces viewing flare. The mask helps you see soft tissue and low contrast

information. Automatic mask placement normally corresponds to the placement of collimator blades. To apply automatic Surround Mask: If you have the optional Automatic Surround Mask feature, automatic mask is ON by default. The Show Mask check box is checked. •

See also:

Using the Surround Mask Tab Using the Image Viewer Screen Applying Manual Masking Reprocessing After Using a Mask Mask Points Are Off the Screen Reducing Noise Using Grid Suppression Software Adjusting Image Parameters


146/454

5/22/2018



Mask Points Are Off the Screen To find a mask point when it is off the image, you can change the magnification so you can see the points. 1. At the Image Viewer Screen, select the Magnification Tab

.

2. Select 25% zoom. 3. Select the Surround Tab. 4. Select Edit Mask. 5. Move the circular or rectangular control points on the mask on the smaller image.

See also:

Applying Manual Masking Reprocessing After Using a Mask


147/454

5/22/2018



Applying Manual Surround Mask (optional) Manual Surround Mask is used when Automatic Surround Masking is not sufficient. 1. From the Image Viewer Screen on the Surround Mask Tab, check the Edit Mask check box. 2. To change the shape of the mask: Select a circle (corner) or rectangle (side) on the mask, then drag it to another location. •

Select a side and select another location on the image.

Use the green arrows on the editor to move a selected side or edge.

•

•

3.

Select Reprocess.

4.

Select Save Changes.

See also:

Using the Image Viewer Screen Applying Automatic Masking Mask Points Are Off the Screen Reprocessing After Using a Mask Adjusting Image Parameters


148/454

5/22/2018



Reprocessing After Using Edit Mask The Reprocess Image button becomes active when you modify the Surround Mask with Edit Mask. The Region of Interest (ROI) is redefined based on the current location of the mask if you select the Reprocess Image button. This may improve the appearance of the image, but not as much as collimating to the body part. See also: Region of Interest Tool Reprocessing the Image


149/454

5/22/2018



Measurement Tools

Using Measurement Tools This feature provides tools that let you make measurements on the image. It is accessed from the Image Viewer Screen .The Measurement Tools calculate angles and distances between specified points at the film plane. The system does not make adjustments to the measurements based on the relative positions of the tube, patient and CR cassette. The reported values from the measurements are directly calculated at the detector plane without any compensation of geometric magnification.

Three different measurement tools are available. Select the Tool Icon below to see a sample of the tools. Tool

Function

Directions for Use

Measures the distance between two points.

Select the Distance icon on the Measurement Tools Tab.

Distance

Select a point to anchor the tool. Select another point on the image to form the line. Tool, use To move directional arrows onthe theDistance Measurement Toolthe Tab to move the line.

To change the Distance Tool, select the points and select another location on the image. To remove the Distance Tool, select the line on the image and then select the trash can.


150/454

5/22/2018



Angle

Measures an angle from three selected points on the image.

Select the Angle icon on the Measurement Tools Tab. Select the first, second, and third points on the image to form the drawing of the angle. To move the Angle Tool, use the directional arrows on the Measurement Tool Tab. To change the Angle Tool, select the points and select another location for each point. To remove the Angle Tool, select the angle on the image and then select the trash can.

Cobb Angle

Measures the angle of intersection between two lines drawn on

Select the Cobb Angle icon on the Measurement Tools Tab. The Cobb Angle measures curved shapes such as hips or spines.

the Used image. to determine the angle of a curve.

Select a second point to form a line.

Select a point on the image. Select another point on the image. Select a second point to form a second line. The Cobb Angle is calculated for the arc between two lines. To move the Cobb Angle Tool, use the directional arrows on the Measurement Tool Tab. To change the Cobb Angle, select the points in the lines and drag to another location. To remove the Cobb Angle, select the angle or lines on the image and then select the trash can.

See also:

Measurement Tool Sample


151/454

5/22/2018



Measurement Tool Sample


152/454

5/22/2018



Optimizing the Exam

Performing the Exam What size cassette should I use? Use the smallest cassette capable of fully including the anatomy.

What is collimation? Why should I do it?

Collimation means to manually adjust the size of the X-ray field so that the area exposed and imaged by the X-ray is just that area necessary for the diagnosis.

Collimation decreases scatter, increases detail and contrast, and helps optimize the image processing software by determining the correct area of interest on the screen.

Collimation is very important to your initial exposure. Apply as much as is practically possible.

•

•

•

Why should I use lead behind the patient? Use lead behind the patient to reduce X-ray scatter. For example, you can improve Lateral L-Spine images with careful collimation. Place a strip of lead behind the patient to decrease scatter.

How should I expose for soft tissue? Use normal technique factors for Images exposed for soft tissue (lateral soft tissue neck).

Should I put more than one image on a cassette? Typically, capture only one image per cassette, such as a Posteroanterior (PA) hand on one cassette, and a Lateral hand on a separate cassette. When you put more than one exposure on a cassette:

•

Leave a small gap of unexposed area between two consecutive images. The width of the gap should be greater than 0.5 in.(1.27 cm) but smaller than 1.0 in. (2.54 cm).

Avoid overlapping the exposure fields.

•

Place the exposure fields close to the cassette center.

Expose all of the images in the same orientation and in similar size.

•

•

Large gaps between images and overlapping fields can adversely affect the image contrast and masking. Another option is to create a multi-format image. See What Is Multi-format Printing?

How are multi-exposure cassettes processed? 1. Separate the images using Surround Masking. 2. Process each image separately. See also:


153/454

5/22/2018



More Image Data Determining the Exposure Index


154/454

5/22/2018



Improving Acquisition Techniques How can I improve my image quality?

Choose the appropriate cassette size.

Choose the appropriate View.

•

•

Guidelines for Good Exposures

Reduce back-scatter radiation.

Reduce off-focus radiation.

Make sure collimator blades are working efficiently.

Use grids when appropriate.

Use good collimation practices. Be mindful of the cathode/anode orientation and heel effect.

•

•

•

•

•

See also:

Changing Image Processing Preferences


155/454

5/22/2018



Determining the Exposure Index What is the Exposure Index (EI)?

The Exposure Index (EI) is the average code value for the area that the image processing software determined was the Region of Interest.

If the system used the incorrect Region of Interest, the EI value may be inaccurate.

The EI is affected by exposure, kVp, collimation, the View chosen for processing, and filtration in the X-ray tube.

Under standard X-ray beam conditions, 80 kVp with 0.5 mm Cu and 1.0 mm AL filtration at the tube, the relationship between EI and the cassette incident exposure level mR is EI = 1000 x log 10 (mR) + 2000.

•

•

•

•

For example, at 1.0 mR exposure level the EI should be 2000. Every time the dose is doubled or halved, the Exposure Index will increase or decrease by 300. Use EI as a guide, not as an absolute value.

What should the EI value be? Users should define the exposure techniques for acceptable image quality, then define the EI range guidance for a variety of exam types. Typical EI ranges can be from 1500 to 1800.

What do I do if the EI is too low? If the EI is too low make sure these kVp guidelines are used:

Make sure that the image quality is acceptable for diagnosis. If not, try adjusting the image quality controls first.

Use a minimum of 55 kVp on extremities.

Use 85 - 90 kVp for average sized non-grid portable chests.

Because the EI is calculated by image processing algorithms, it is possible that the processing has failed to correctly report the EI.

•

•

•

•

A lower EI may mean that the exposure factors were not adequate and the image will be noisy,

•

grainy, or mottled.

What do I do if the EI is too high?

Check to see if the image quality is acceptable for diagnosis. If not, try adjusting the image quality controls first.

Because the Exposure Index (EI) is calculated by image processing algorithms, it is possible that the processing has failed to correctly report the EI.

•

•

A higher Exposure Index may indicate that a large amount of radiation struck the cassette. Often

•

this happens when a large cassette is used for an exam such as a cross-table lateral hip or when collimation is not adequate.


156/454

5/22/2018



•

If an exam is not collimated closely, direct areas of exposure may adversely affect the image processing and consequently the final image.

Why might my image look light when the exposure is high? A light image could be caused by the following: An excessive dose could cause image processing to fail. •

•

Misidentification of the region of interest. The EI is the average code value of the region of interest if the direct exposure regions have been identified as the Region of Interest.

Why is the EI so high? I did not overexpose it! A high EI may be caused by a misidentification of the Region of Interest in the image processing. Reasons for this may include

•

•

excessive scatter poor collimation

See also:

What do I do if the EI is too high?

Check to see if the image quality is acceptable for diagnosis. If not, try adjusting the image quality controls first.

Because the Exposure Index (EI) is calculated by image processing algorithms, it is possible that the processing has failed to correctly report the EI.

•

•

A higher Exposure Index may indicate that a large amount of radiation struck the cassette. Often

•

this happens when a large cassette is used for an exam such as a cross-table lateral hip or

•

when collimation is not adequate. If an exam is not collimated closely, direct areas of exposure may adversely affect the image processing and consequently the final image.


157/454

5/22/2018



Patient CD

Study Data Patient CD (optional) Patient CD is an optional feature that lets you easily create a CD (or DVD) of a single patient study, or all studies for a single patient. The images recorded on the CD are in both a DICOM DIR format and JPEG (.jpg) format. The Patient CD lets you transport images easily and allows

viewing by anyone having a computer with a DICOM Viewer. You can compose a Patient CD on a Console or a Remote Operations Panel, but the media is actually created at the Console containing the CD writer. Only CR Systems having this optional feature will display the Patient CD Queue Screen or the Write Patient CD menu option in the Quick Menu. Creating a Patient CD does not interfere with normal CR System operations. There is no effect on the Graphic User Interface (GUI) and the time it takes to move from screen to screen. How to delete a Patient CD job:

1. From the Patient CD Jobs Screen, select the job you would like to delete. 2. Select Remove from List. You can view images on a personal computer using DICOM Viewer software (available free at http://medical.nema.org/).

To create a Patient CD: 1. Select a blank, non-formatted CD or DVD. Images cannot be appended to other sessions. 2. On the Patient Input Screen, create a patient record and acquire images. 3. Select the Quick Menu. 4. Select Write Patient CD. 5. If multiple studies were created, a pop-up message asks you to select one of the following:

Write all images in this study to CD; Only save images for the opened study.

Write all images from all studies to CD; Save images for all studies for this patient.

•

•

6. Select OK. The CD request is added to the Patient CD Jobs queue. 7. Either select the Disc icon at the top of the page or select the Quick Menu > Patient CD Jobs List to enter the Patient CD Jobs Menu (also located in Main Menu > Utilities > Patient CD Jobs). 8. The PatientCD Jobs Screen appears. 9. If multiple CD jobs exist, select the desired row from the list and select Write To CD. The status for th3e selected job changes from Ready > Burn CD > Burning CD > Done. 10. Select the Back button to return to the Utilities Menu. To return to the Patient Input Screen, use the Quick Menu to select the Patient Record.


158/454

5/22/2018



Writing images to the Patient CD does not change the delivery status of any image. When you are performing a Backup and Restore function, make sure that the user at the ROP does not initiate a Patient CD.

To automatically create a Patient CD: 1. Select Key Operator Function > System Configuration > Delivery Preferences > Write Patient CDs Immediately. 2. Select a blank, non-formatted CD or DVD. Images cannot be appended to other sessions. 3. On the Patient Input Screen, create a patient record and acquire images. 4. Select the Quick Menu.

5. Select Write Patient CD. If blank media is not loaded, a "Please insert a writable CD" pop-up message appears.

Load a blank, non-formatted CD or DVD.

Select OK.

•

•

The Disc icon at the top of the page changes to a burning disc icon. Writing images to the Patient CD does not change the delivery status of any image. When you are performing a Backup and Restore function, make sure that the user at the ROP does not initiate a Patient CD.


159/454

5/22/2018



Printing

Using the Print Tab The Print Tab lets you change the orientation of the image in the Image Viewer Screen. It also lets you place an Internal or External Text Box in the image. 1. Place a check in the check box of the text box you want. 2. Select the button that orients the image as indicated in the table below. Internal Text Box

Prints a text box within the image area. You can select from eight different positions on the image to position the text box.

External Text Box

Prints an external text box that falls outside the image area. The external text box has two positions: the bottom or the left side of the image.

External Position

Moves the external text box from the bottom of the image to the left side of the image.

Rotate 90° CW or 90° CCW

Rotates the image 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise.

Flip Horizontal or Flip Vertical

Flips the image horizontally or vertically.

Save Changes

Saves the changes to the database. Select when all changes on the screen are finished.

The changes can be seen in the Image Viewer as you make them.


160/454

5/22/2018



The Key Operator can set the default flip and rotate characteristics for each View. See also:

Positioning an Internal Text Box Positioning an External Text Box Rotating and Flipping the Image


161/454

5/22/2018



Using the Multi-format Configuration Screen The Multi-format Configuration Screen lets you compare images by placing multiple images on a single print. You can rotate or flip the images to optimize the comparison. If you want to print the images in a multi-format print as True-size, you must select the True Size radio button for each individual image before you create the multi-format print. When selecting True-size in a multi-format print, the rotation of images is automatically oriented in order to make the best use of the film. To select a multi-format:

1. Select a 2-, 3-, or 4-up layout in crosswise or lengthwise format.

2. Select the section of the layout where you want the image to appear. 3. Select a thumbnail. 4. Select from the following:

Justification (right, left, center)

Image Internal Text Boxes, Image External Text Boxes, Page External Text Box

Flip Horizontal

Rotate 90° CW (Clockwise)

•

•

•

•

5. When images have been acquired, positioned, and oriented, select Print. Any quadrants not used will print black.


162/454

5/22/2018



Multi-format images are only delivered to print destinations. You can print multi-format images regardless of the printer type and film size. See also:

Selecting a Destination Creating Multi-format Prints


163/454

5/22/2018



Selecting a Destination Select Destination lets you automatically deliver your images to specific printers or PACS workstations. Select Destination is located on the Image Viewer Screen. To select a destination:

•

Place a check mark next to the destination on the Select Destination Screen. The destination may be a specific film size or type of image that requires a specific printer.

To select a different Destination Profile:

•

Select Change Destination Profile from the Patient Input Screen.

To print an image:

1. Select the thumbnail to display the image in the Image Viewer Screen. 2. Select Save & Accept Image to send the image to all pre-defined destinations. See also:

Using the Print Tab Using the Patient Input Screen Using the Multi-format Configuration Screen Creating Multi-format Prints Creating a True-size Print


164/454

5/22/2018



Selecting a Text Box To select the appropriate Text Box, consider the type of image area that is displayed. You can make the selection or the Key Operator can select a default Text Box for any given View.

Select the Internal Text Box when you want the information to appear within the image and when you must be able to print to any printer. The Text Box can be moved to any corner or any inside edge to avoid covering any anatomy.

Select the External Text Box when you want to position the label outside the image area. This Text Box shrinks the image and affects True-size printing.

•

•

The Key Operator configures a Text Box to automatically fill in with data, such as Hospital Name, Exposure Index, or View. See also:

Positioning an Internal Text Box Positioning an External Text Box


165/454

5/22/2018



Positioning an Internal Text Box You can locate the Text Box in eight different locations, horizontally or vertically, in each corner of the image on the Image Viewer Screen.

1. At the Image Viewer Screen, select the Print Tab

.

2. Select the Internal Text Box check box. 3. Select the point on the image where you want to place the text box. 4. Select Save Changes. 5. Select Save & Accept Image to send the image to the selected printers and workstations.

See also:

Using the Image Viewer Screen Using the Multi-format Configuration Screen


166/454

5/22/2018



Positioning an External Text Box

1. At the Image Viewer Screen, select the Print Tab

.

2. Select the External Text Box check box. The Text Box appears on the screen. 3. Select the External Position button to move the Text Box to the position you want. 4. Select Save Changes. 5. Select Accept Image to send to selected printers and workstations. See also:

Selecting a Text Box Using the Image Viewer Screen


167/454

5/22/2018



Image Review Creating a True-size Print True-size produces the same size image you would get if you were using a film-screen system. True-size always crops the print slightly. Use the crop box to determine what part of the image

will be printed.

1. At the Image Viewer Screen, select the Crop Box Adjustment Tab

.

2. Select the True-size Print radio button. 3. Select the Crop Box Orientation arrows to locate the crop box on the area of the image to be printed. 4. Select Save Changes. 5. Select Accept Image to send the image to selected printers and workstations. True-size printing delivers the image to the destination at 100% +/-2%. Because variations exist in scanners and printers, use caution when using these images for exact measurements. Use a known marker at the subject level when making the exposure and calculating image magnification. To support True-size printing, a printer must support DICOM Requested Image Size. See the printer’s DICOM Conformance Statement to determine if a printer supports Requested Image Size. See also:

Using the Image Viewer Screen Using the Print Tab Printing an Image


168/454

5/22/2018



What Is Multi-format Printing? Multi-format printing lets you combine 2, 3, or 4 images and print them on one page. When you create a multi-format print:

•

Image aspect ratio is maintained. Images from any cassette size can be placed together in a multi-format print.

Images are printed crosswise or lengthwise in 2- or 4-up layouts.

Images are printed with saved Image Processing parameters, markers, and orientation.

•

•

•

Multi-format images are only delivered to print destinations. See also:

Creating Multi-format Prints Selecting Multi-formats Adding a Multi-format Print


169/454

5/22/2018



Best Fit to Print Rotates the image 90 degrees.

Multi-Format Print Layout (Landscape)

Image Orientation on Viewer (Portrait)

Best Fit

Shrink to Fit


170/454

5/22/2018



Creating Multi-format Prints The Key Operator can automatically configure Multi-Format printing within the optional Procedure Mapping function.

The Multi-format icon on the Image Viewer Screen indicates whether the image is currently in a multi-format print. If it is not, the button appears as a blue rectangle. If an image is in a multi-format print, then a multi-format icon appears. Select the Multi-format icon to do one of the following:

Create a new multi-format print for this study.

Change an existing multi-format print.

Print a multi-format print.

•

•

•

The Multi-format Configuration Screen opens so that you can make additional changes to the print if desired. To set up a multi-format print:

1. Select the blue button

next to the Save & Accept Image button.

2. Select the format for the multi-format print. 3. Select the image to place in the highlighted box. 4. Select True-size, if desired. 5. Select whether to deliver the individual images with the multi-format prints. The image displays the Text Box and the True-size print outline if it was set up in multiformat. You do not need to have two or more images before accessing the multi-print screen. To position a multi-format print:

1. Select an image to place it in the first empty square in the multi-format print. 2. To select a different location, select the location, then select the image. The image is added to the print layout. The layout location is highlighted in yellow. 3. The thumbnail image frame turns green when selected. 4. Continue selecting images until the layout is complete. You can include an image as many times as you like. To remove an image, select the image and then select the trash can. You can flip or rotate images after they have been included in a multi-format print. 5. Select Save Changes. To change the orientation in a multi-format print, open the image in the Image Viewer Screen, make and save the changes.


171/454

5/22/2018



To print a multi-format print:

•

Select Print to print the multi-format image.

The image is sent to the displayed printer unless you change the destination using Select Destination. Any locations on the multi-format print that you leave blank will print black. If the multi-format layout fails to print to the selected destination, an error message appears. Select the Deliver button on the Image Viewer Screen to attempt to redeliver the image or select a different destination (if applicable) and select the Deliver button. See also:

Using the Multi-format Configuration Screen Selecting Multi-formats


172/454

5/22/2018



Selecting Multi-formats If you have started a multi-format print and you change your mind, you can select a different layout without starting over. To select a different multi-format layout:

1. From the Multi-format Configuration Screen, select Delete Multi-format Print. 2. Select a new multi-format layout if desired. 3. Select the image and new location. 4. Select Save Changes. Deleting a multi-format print

Deletes the current multi-format layout in the Multi-Format Configuration Screen.

Lets you select a new multi-format layout if desired.

Deletes only formatting. The images are not changed.

•

•

•

See also:

Using the Multi-format Configuration Screen Adding a Multi-format Print Creating Multi-format Prints What Is Multi-format Printing?


173/454

5/22/2018



Adding a Multi-format Print

From the Patient Input Screen, select Change Multi-format Configuration.

From the Image Viewer Screen, select the Multi-format icon.

•

•

See Using the Multi-format Configuration Screen for information about formatting the print. You can access the Multi-format Configuration Screen from any screen where images can be sent to destinations, such as the Patient Input Screen or Image Viewer Screen. See also:

Using the Multi-format Configuration Screen Using the Patient Input Screen Using the Image Viewer Screen


174/454

5/22/2018



Searching Techniques

Finding an Image There are at least two options for finding an image you cannot locate quickly. Both options begin at the Main Menu. 1. At the Main Menu, select Study Data. 2. At the Patient Query Screen, select Find Locally. 3. Select the study from the Patient Work List. 4. Select the image. or At the Main Menu, select Image Review. 5. At the Image List Screen, filter the database for the patient's image. 6. Select a status (All, Unassigned, Delivered, etc.). 7. Select the image. See also:

Searching for an Existing Patient Improving Search Results Using the Patient Query Screen Using the Patient Work List Screen Using the Image List Screen


175/454

5/22/2018



Identifying Work List Colors The Work List is colorful in order to save you time as you view the list searching for patients. For example, you can quickly assess the Arrived patients because they will all appear in green. The standard colors have the following meanings. Scheduled Started Arrived Failed Update Complete

All colors are subject to change by the Key Operator. See also:

Finding an Image Improving Search Results Searching for an Existing Patient Using the Patient Work List Screen


176/454

5/22/2018



Improving Search Results Use the Patient Query Screen to locate studies. Enter search criteria to return a list of all studies that meet those criteria. For example: Enter the search criteria Today to return a list of all studies entered in the system today to the Patient Work List Screen. To perform a search:

1. If you do not enter any criteria, there is no filter and a list of all patients in the system will be returned. Returning large volumes of data can cause system slowdowns. For best results, select a narrow time window filter of Yesterday—Tomorrow. 2. Select Find Study Locally to search the CR or DR database. 3. Select Find Study Remotely to search the CR or DR database, and to query the HIS/RIS immediately. If no records match the criteria:

1. Check the criteria carefully for errors in spelling, accurate time window, correct patient ID, etc. 2. Select the Find Study Remotely button to query the HIS/RIS. Newly entered records from the HIS/RIS may take a few minutes before they can be polled by the modality. Select the New Patient button as a last resort to manually enter the patient information. 3. Select the New Patient button, which will take you to the Patient Input Screen to enter the information. If emergency patient information is not available or emergency circumstances do not allow the time to enter data, immediately proceed to using the Trauma function.

How do I search for a patient? 1. On the Patient Query Screen, enter the information for the patient you wish to find in the appropriate field. This is the search criteria. The more specific the data, the more likely you are to retrieve the specific patient record you seek. 2. Select CR, DX, RT or ALL from the modality field. If you select ALL, patient records for all modalities are returned. 3. Select a time range:

Today

Yesterday to Tomorrow

•

•

•

•

Past Week to Tomorrow Unrestricted

The Unrestricted option means that time is not used as a selection criteria when searching for a patient. If more than one record matches information used in the query, the system presents a work list of all matching records.


177/454

5/22/2018



4. After entering the search criteria, select the Find Study Locally or Find Study Remotely button if you want to retrieve the record from the HIS/RIS. Using the Find Study Locally will only search the System's database. Large returns of records can cause system slowdowns. For best results, narrow the search by selecting a narrow time window such as Yesterday to Tomorrow.

How do I search for a patient whose study is completed? 1. Enter the search criteria for Study Status Completed. 2. Select the Find Study Locally button. This function returns a list of patients that match the search criteria. If only a single record is found, that record appears on the Patient Input Screen. or Enter the search criteria for a normal search. 3. Select Find Locally button.

Why can't I find a specific patient when I select Find Study Locally? The record may not be on the local system.

The record may not be on the local system because the patient record may not have been received by the system via the DICOM Work List.

•

Select Find Study Remotely to search and retrieve the patient record from the Work List provider.

The search criteria may be incorrect or too limiting.

1. Review the criteria to make it less restrictive. 2. Select Find Study Locally again. The system only finds patient records that satisfy all the search criteria specified.

Why don't I see a Work List when I select Find Study Remotely? Select a different search criteria.

If the Find Study Remotely function does not return a Work List that includes the individual patient you are searching for, it is usually because the search criteria is incorrect or too limiting.

•

Review the criteria or make it less restrictive and select Find Study Remotely again. The Find Study Remotely operation may "time out" if the Work List provider is not functioning properly. The Work List providing device is part of your site’s HIS/RIS and is normally supported by the IT group.

Contact the IT group for assistance if this problem occurs repeatedly.

See also:


178/454

5/22/2018



Identifying Work List Colors Using the Patient Query Screen Using the Patient List Screen Searching for an Existing Patient Using the Find Study Locally Button Using the Find Study Remotely Button Finding an Image


179/454

5/22/2018



Searching for an Existing Patient What are the search criteria?

The Study Status field Lets you select from the following study states: Scheduled •

Arrived

•

Started

Scheduled/Arrived/Started

Scheduled/Arrived

Completed

Failed Update

Cancelled

•

•

•

•

•

•

All

•

The Time field

Today

Today to Tomorrow

Yesterday to Tomorrow

Past Week to Tomorrow

Unrestricted

•

•

•

•

•

The Unrestricted option Unrestricted means that time will not be used as a selection criterion when searching for a

patient.

The Modality field

CR

DX

•

•

RT ALL

•

•

If you select ALL, patient records for all Modalities are returned.


180/454

5/22/2018



The Failed Update status Failed Update Status lets you find patient records whose status has not been forwarded to the PACS system due to equipment or network problems. Use this feature if the Scheduled Workflow option is installed on the System.

After entering the search criteria, select the Find Study Locally or Find Study Remotely button. Use the Find Study Remotely if you want to retrieve the record from the HIS/RIS. (Using the Find Study Locally button only searches the System's local database).

See also:

Improving Search Results Using the Patient Query Screen Using the Patient Work List Screen Finding an Image


181/454

5/22/2018



Using the Patient Query Screen Use the Patient Query Screen to locate studies. Enter search criteria to return a list of all studies that meet those criteria. For example, enter the search criteria Today to return a list of all today's studies to the Patient Work List Screen. If emergency patient information is not available or emergency circumstances do not allow the time to enter data, immediately proceed to using the Trauma function. See also:

Finding an Image Improving Search Results Searching for an Existing Patient Using the Patient Work List Screen Using the Image List Screen


182/454

5/22/2018



Using the Patient Work List Screen The Patient Work List Screen provides a listing of studies by status from the combined local and remote databases. To find a study quickly:

1. Set up a query from the Patient Query Screen. 2. Select Find Study Locally. 3. Select a study from the Work List. The Patient Input Screen opens with that patient and study. The studies are listed on the Patient Work List Screen according to the filters from the Patient Query Screen. They are sorted based on a setting from the Key Operator. You can resort the list by selecting one of the headers on the screen. See also:

Improving Search Results


183/454

5/22/2018



Using the Image List Screen The Image List screen allows you to locate images quickly by applying filters to sort the images on the local database. How to search with the Image List Screen:

1. Enter patient information at the top of the screen by bar coding or enter manually using the keyboard. 2. Search the resulting list by patient data such as Patient's Name, Patient ID, Accession Number, Tech ID, or Acquisition Date. These filters are located across the top of the list window. 3. Select a filter to search by image status:

•

All Studies This filter generates links to all non-delivered studies with the criteria you entered, such as Patient Name, Patient ID, Accession Number, Tech ID, or Acquisition Date.

•

Need Approval This filter generates links to all images that have not been accepted.

•

Unassigned Images This filter generates links to all images that do not have a patient assigned to them. This filter is linked to the Images Not Assigned button that appears on the Main Menu.

•

Failed Delivery This filter generates links to all images that have been accepted and sent to destinations, but failed. You can access this group from a button on the Main Menu Screen at any time.

•

Pending Delivery This filter generates links to all studies that have been accepted and sent but the CR/DR has not heard back from the destination-delivery is in progress.

•

Need Destination This filter generates links to all studies that have been accepted but not assigned a destination.

Delivered Images

•

All images that have been delivered to printers and workstations. A delivered image cannot be changed or reprocessed unless a copy of the image is made.


184/454

5/22/2018



See also:

Improving Search Results Finding an Image


185/454

5/22/2018



Views

Defining a View A View is a pre-set image type that a radiographer can select to represent an exam. It consists of position, projection, and image processing preferences. It is the basic element in the CR or DR image chain. Views are associated with procedures on the Patient Input Screen with the optional Procedure Mapping. When the Key Operator creates a view, it appears on the Patient Input Screen. See also:

Adding a View Deleting a View Changing the View Name


186/454

5/22/2018



Adding a View You can choose from three procedure workflows to add Views to a study. You can add as many Views as you like. Setting Up Views for Procedures In most instances, the View selection is complete once the procedure is selected. To add additional Views to the procedure:

1. Select Add View. 2. Select the Primary Category. 3. Select the Secondary Category. 4. Select all of the desired Views for the study. 5. Select Save Changes. An image of a cassette represents the image until it is scanned. Some facilities use a "tutor" image representing the View to provide a reference for the radiographer. When you scan an image, the reference image changes to a thumbnail of the actual image. Displaying Image Icons See also:

Defining a View Using the Patient Input Screen Add View Button Deleting a View Changing the View Name Setting Up Views for Procedures


187/454

5/22/2018



Deleting a View 1. Select the tutor image. A yellow highlight appears around the icon to indicate this image has been selected. 2. Select the Delete View button on the bottom of the screen. An image that has been acquired cannot be deleted from the Patient Input Screen. See also:

Using the Patient Input Screen Defining a View Adding a View Changing the View Name


188/454

5/22/2018



Changing the View Name Before image acquisition, you can change the view name on the Patient Input Screen. 1. Select the image with the View Name to change. 2. Select the View Name field. 3. Select a View from a different category by selecting the primary or secondary keyboard tabs on the View keyboard. After the image is acquired, you can change the View Name on the Image Viewer Screen.

1. At the Image Viewer Screen, select the Image Processing Options Editor Tab

.

2. Select the View Name field. 3. Select a region from the Primary Category. 4. Select a body part from the Secondary Category. 5. Select a View. 6. Select Save Changes. Categories

Primary Category

Select an anatomical region.

Secondary Category

Select a body part.

Views

Select a view.

While the image has a new View Name, it retains the image processing of the former View Name. Select Reprocess to process the image with the new name. Reprocess the View Name if it is an incorrect match for the image. Do not reprocess if the image processing is satisfactory. When y o u s el ec t a v i ew, t he Br i g ht nes s , Lat i t ude, and Det ail Cont r as t s et t i ng s ar e d e t e rm i n e d a u t o m a t ic a l l y a n d a p p l i ed f o r y o u i f r e p r o c e s s i n g a n e x i s t i n g i m a g e .

See also:

Defining a View Using the Patient Input Screen Using the Image Viewer Screen Reprocessing the Image


189/454

5/22/2018



190/454

5/22/2018


Capture Link System Basic information

Joining Devices To join a Console to the Capture Link System:

1. Deliver all undelivered images that were scanned in Standalone mode. 2. At the Capture Link Configuration Screen, enter the IP address of the Capture Link Server. 3. Select Connect to a Capture Link Server . 4. Select Save Changes and reboot. 5. When you get the message "Do you want to connect?" select Yes. Once a machine joins the Capture Link System, it is no longer in Standalone mode. Patient and exam data created in Standalone mode and images captured on the machine in Standalone mode are not accessible in Capture Link mode (although they all remain on the hard drive). Make sure to deliver all images captured in Standalone mode before joining to the Capture Link System. When joining to the Capture Link System, a message reminds you to deliver all images. See also:

Introducing the Capture Link System Capture Link System Workflow Capture Link System Range of Operation Identifying Active Devices Identifying Icons Standalone Mode


191/454

5/22/2018



Capture Link System Workflow In a Capture Link System, all patient records and all patient images from any device joined to the Capture Link System are available for review and use on any device joined to the Capture Link System. When thumbnail images are displayed, the name of the machine of origin appears in the border of the image after it leaves the Capture Link System. The name appears on the Image List at the Capture Link Server and any Modality joined to the Capture Link System. An example of a Capture Link System workflow:

1. Start a study that includes multiple cassettes or exams. 2. Initiate the study at any Console or Remote Operations Panel (ROP). 3. Perform any of the following activities at any Console or ROP:

Edit Patient/Exam data.

Read the cassette bar-code.

Scan CR cassettes at any CR Console.

Review images, adjust Image Processing, add markers.

•

•

•

•

Add views or exams.

•

Images are grouped, stored, and labeled for all destinations. See also:

Capture Link System Range of Operation Identifying Active Devices Identifying Icons Introducing the Capture Link System


192/454

5/22/2018


Capture Link System

Capture Link System Range of Operation Application of Configuration Attributes to DIRECTVIEW Capture Link CR Systems

When setting system configurations for a machine that is part of a Capture Link group the extent of use for these parameters varies. The levels of use ( scope) are: All CR Systems on the Capture Link System

•

All CR Systems of the Same Model on the Capture Link System

•

Unique for each CR System

Unique for each system on the Capture Link System, CRs, Remote Operating Panels (ROP) and Remote Access Software (RAS)

•

•

For ROP and RAS applications, their configuration is derived from the CR to which they are attached. Every configurable item in the KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR System is assigned a scoping level, or range of use. This level determines if changing an item at one device will cause the same change at a different device within a Capture Link environment. There are 5 different levels of scoping:

Universal View Configuration

All (except fields that are configured from the Image Processing Preference Editor)

Procedure Mapping

These configuration items are identical on every machine that is a member of the Capture Link System: The Capture Link Server, the CR/DR consoles, and ROP/RAS devices.

Example: The HIS/RIS Server information is the same for every machine.

All Fields

Configuration Profile Configuration

All Fields

List Configuration

All Fields

Reject Reasons

All Fields

Layout Configuration Trauma

Marker Editors All Fields


193/454

5/22/2018



Defaults Display Configuration

Patient Query Tab Patient Input Tab (Including Auto Populate Tech ID) Patient Link Tab Other (Except clicks volume)

Bar-Code Configuration

Delivery Preferences

Tab key and

All except Device Type & Com Port Remove Print from 1-up on MF Print Upper Case on Delivery Translate Body Part and Projection

HIS/RIS Polling and Remote Query

All Fields

Regional Configuration

All Fields

Customizable Field Descriptions

All Fields

Long-Length Configuration s

Auto update sub-images to delivered

System Maintenance

All

Configurable Text Boxes

Marker Transparency

Remote Device Configuration

All Fields

Security

All

User


194/454

5/22/2018


Capture Link System

Administrator

Configuration s

Security Administrator

All Security Configuration s


All Roles Configuration s

Display Configuration

Other> Clicks Volume

Key and

These configuration items can be different for everything, even ROP & RAS devices.

Bar Code Configuration

Device Type and COM

Example: Key click volume might need to be louder for a ROP that is in a loud

Port SID Values

room, room. but quiet in a different

Single Device Only

Long-Length Configuration s Network Settings

All Fields These configuration items can be different for every CR/DR device in a cluster. ROP/RAS devices will use the configuration of the machine that they are currently connected to.

Single Machine Only Image Processing Preference Editor

All Fields

Required Fields

All Fields

Layout Configuration

Patient Layout

Input

Remote Patient Data Entry System Delivery Preferences

Hospital Name

Example: Preventative Maintenance reminders are machine-based because the last service time for each machine can be different.

and

Address Operating Mode Long-Length Configuration

QA Mode for Long-Length Imaging SID Values


195/454

5/22/2018



Configurable Text Boxes

Text Layout

Box

Text Box Transparency Security Configuration

All Fields

Preventative Maintenance Configuration

All Fields

MIM Destinations

All Fields

Same Product Family Layout Configuratio n

Image Viewer Editors Patient Names

Color Preferences

All Fields


Delivery Mode Upper Case on Delivery Translate Body Part and Projection

Same Machine Model Layout Configuration

Image Viewer Editors

When using CR/DR integration on a Capture Link System &endash; These configuration items are the Family same within a Product (all CR devices, all DR devices, or the Capture Link Server within the same family) but can be different for different Product Families. ROP/RAS devices will use the configuration of the machine that they are currently connected to. Example: You may want to use CR IOD on CR devices, but DX IOD for DR devices. These configuration items are the same for every device that has the same model name (CR 850, CR 950, DR 7500) in the Capture Link System. ROP/RAS devices will use the configuration of machine that they currently connected to.

the are

Example: The tabs displayed on the Image Viewer Screen may vary within different applications based on the capabilities of


196/454

5/22/2018


Capture Link System

that specific model.


197/454

5/22/2018



Identifying Active Devices in the Capture Link System The Status of the Capture Link System is seen in Utilities in Capture Link Server Status.

•

Select Ping Devices. The name of each machine in the Capture Link System is listed. The active devices appear with a green dot to indicate good communication or a red dot to indicate a communications problem.

See also:

Using the Capture Link Server Status Screen Using the Capture Link Server Troubleshooting the Capture Link System


198/454

5/22/2018


Capture Link System

Identifying Icons Once you configure a Console for the Capture Link System and communicate with the Server, a Capture Link icon appears in the upper right corner of the title bar on the Console or device screen. When communication is active and intact, the icon is green. If the network becomes disconnected from the device and is unable to automatically reconnect within 10 minutes, the icon turns red. When you see this icon

It means

What you should do

Always shown on Capture Link Server or Mini-Capture Link Server.

Use the Capture Link System.

Able to communicate with

Remain in Standalone

the Capture Link Server, but the Capture Link Server is down.

Mode until the icon changes showing that you can communicate with the Capture Link Server. Deliver all images and finish working on the current exam before rejoining the Capture Link System.

Able to communicate with the Capture Link Server and the Capture Link Server is up and running.

Use the Capture Link System.

Not able to communicate with the Capture Link Server and the Capture Link Server is down.

You are not connected to the Capture Link Server. The Server is down. Do not reconnect.

Not able to communicate with the Capture Link Server, but the Capture Link Server is up and running.

You are not connected to the Capture Link Server. The Server is running but you cannot

What do I do if the Capture Link icon turns red?

reconnect.

1. When the light turns red, allow five minutes for the communications problem to clear. 2. Reset the Capture Link System connection by restarting in Standalone mode and reconnecting. What if I see a red icon on the first attempt to connect?

1. Check to see if the server IP address is typed correctly.


199/454

5/22/2018



2. Check to see if the server is accessible on the network. See also:

Rejoining the Capture Link System Removing a Console from the Capture Link System


200/454

5/22/2018


Capture Link System

Using the Capture Link System How does the Capture Link System work?

The KODAK DIRECTVIEW Capture Link System automatically finds the correct patient data, no matter where the image is acquired. You can link multiple devices to the system. Once linked, the various devices share patient and exam data from a single database on the Capture Link Server. You can enter all patient and exam data at the various consoles and external devices, and it is immediately available for use at each device on the Capture Link System. All images in the System may be viewed at any device in the System, although the actual image file remains on the CR or DR system that produced it. After beginning an exam, you can perform the following functions from any point on the network: Add a View

•

Edit patient and exam information

Review images

•

•

Approve images

•

Check for quality

Manipulate images

Reject images

Deliver to destinations

•

•

•

•

What can I link to a Capture Link System?

You can link up to five CR or DR Consoles and up to 20 external devices (such as an ROP or RPDES) to a Capture Link System at one time.

Remote Operations Panels (ROPs) communicate with all CR Consoles in the Capture Link System.

Remote Data Entry Stations, RIG/RDET or a combination of these communicate with the all CR Consoles in the Capture Link System.

You can connect up to 5 System Consoles.

•

•

•

•

What happens if I am not connected to the Capture Link System?

When the CR Console is configured for the Capture Link System but not connected to a Capture Link System, it is in Standalone mode. A console is fully functional in Standalone mode. Standalone mode lets you continue using the CR System if access to the Capture Link Server is disrupted. What systems are compatible with a Capture Link System?

•

KODAK CR Systems that are running KODAK DIRECTVIEW System Software Version 5.1 and higher, including: KODAK DIRECTVIEW Classic and Elite CR Systems

o

KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR 825/850/975 Systems

o

KODAK DIRECTVIEW 19-inch Remote Operations Panel

o


201/454

5/22/2018



KODAK DIRECTVIEW Remote Patient Data Entry Software Version 5.1 or higher

o

KODAK RIG/RDET Software for KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR 800/900 Series

o

A HIS/RIS System that supports the DICOM Modality Work List

o

•

KODAK DR Systems that are running KODAK DIRECTVIEW System Software Version 5.0 and higher.

See also:

Joining Devices Capture Link System Workflow Capture Link System Range of Operation Identifying Icons Standalone Mode


202/454

5/22/2018


Capture Link System

Standalone Mode When the Console is configured for the Capture Link System, but is not yet connected, it is in Standalone mode. A console is fully functional in Standalone mode. Standalone mode lets you continue using your System if Network problems or other causes disable access to the Capture Link Server. Standalone mode is useful for correcting error conditions, such as communication errors that display the red icon. When should I enter Standalone mode?

•

Enter Standalone mode whenever it is necessary to operate the System and the Capture Link network is unavailable. If the network to which the System is connected becomes unavailable, it will be possible to enter patients and scan images, but it will not be possible to deliver images to destinations.

•

Enter Standalone mode to intentionally remove your machine from the Capture Link network.

To enter Standalone mode:

1. Select Shutdown. 2. Deselect Join Capture Link Server after Restart. 3. Select Reboot and OK. See also:

Introducing the Capture Link System Identifying Devices Capture Link System Workflow Capture Link System Range of Operation


203/454

5/22/2018



Basic Capture Link System Operations

Changing Image Processing in the Capture Link System How can the Key Operator make Global Changes to default Image Processing values?

The Key Operator has the same ability to change IP configurations in Capture Link mode as in Standalone mode. See How to Configure a View. For example, the Key Operator can use the Image Processing Preference Editor to change all of the images in an image Category or the images in a specific View. These changes become the defaults for the CR device in the Capture Link System. When you leave the Capture Link System, make sure to restore the parameters to the individual Systems. See Capture Link System Range of Operation.

Use a Console in the Capture Link System to configure image processing preferences across the Capture Link System.

Back up parameters and restore them to each local machine to ensure proper behavior when working off-line.

•

•

1. The Key Operator logs in. 2. From the Key Operator Functions menu, select System Configuration, then select Image Processing Preferences. 3. Select a Category (primary or secondary) or specific View to adjust. What routine changes can the technologist make to the Image Processing for each view?

You can apply the following Image Processing settings and features to any image at any Console or CR ROP such as: A Look (if EVP Plus is enabled)

•

•

•

Brightness, latitude, and detail contrast Noise Suppression

What happens to my Image Processing Values when I join and leave the Capture Link System?

While you are joined to the Capture Link System, the Image Processing Preference configurations are specific to each CR device. When in Standalone mode, each machine uses the Image Processing parameters that were stored on the local machine. How can I make sure the Image Processing parameters in Standalone mode are the same as those used with the Capture Link System?

Each machine uses its own locally saved configuration settings when it operates in Standalone mode. Back up the configuration settings from the Capture Link server and restore them to each individual machine to insure they are identical. Make sure to repeat this process whenever the settings change in the Capture Link System. See also:

Backup and Restore 188 http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/koda k-c r-topic s-sof t-ve r-52

204/454

5/22/2018


Capture Link System

Restoring Configurations from the Server to a Standalone Machine Adjusting Image Parameters Menu Using the Capture Link System What Is Standalone Mode? Configuring Destination Profiles Identifying Active Devices Using Image Recovery to Capture Link List


205/454

5/22/2018



Configuring Destination Profiles with the Capture Link System You can set destination profiles so that images acquired on a certain CR or DR system will always be delivered to a certain destination. There is one set of profiles for the entire Capture Link System. You can add as many as you like for different filter conditions. Profiles in the Capture Link System can include the Modality name, where profiles in Standalone mode do not. Does configuring the destination profile make all the machines in the Capture Link System deliver to the same destination?

Yes, if the images meet the profile filter criteria. For example, if you set up a profile so that cassette size 18 x 24 prints to printer ABC, all cassettes of size 18 x 24 that are scanned anywhere on the Capture Link System will be printed to printer ABC. If this is not what you want, then you can create a machine profile: 1. Go to the Key Operator Functions, System Configuration, and select the Destination Profiles Configuration Screen. 2. Create a profile that specifies a destination and a machine name filter such as: Profile Filters

Result

Machine A images print to printer XYZ

All images scanned on Machine A print to printer XYZ

Machine B images print to printer ABC

All images scanned on Machine B print to printer ABC

With this profile set, any images scanned on Machine B will not go to printer XYZ. Does setting up a new profile override the others in the Capture Link System?

The Capture Link Server selects the profile with the highest priority set by the user. Each image is distributed in accordance with the first profile it matches. The profiles are listed by priority on the interface. You can change the priority by moving profiles up and down the list. The Default Destination Profile will always appear at the bottom of the Destination Profile Name list. For example: The first profile: 18 x 24 Machine A images print to printer XYZ. The second profile: 24 x 30 images print to printer ABC. If an 18 x 24 cassette is scanned on Machine A, the first profile is selected, and it delivers to printer XYZ. If a 24 x 30 cassette is scanned on Machine A, the first profile does not match, so the software moves to the next, and the image is delivered to printer ABC.


206/454

5/22/2018


Capture Link System

Destination Profiles are included in the configuration settings that may differ between Capture

Link mode and Standalone mode. To duplicate the settings between modes, back them up from the Capture Link server and restore them to each machine in Standalone mode.

See also:

Using the Capture Link System


207/454

5/22/2018



Communicating with the HIS/RIS

The Capture Link server connects the Capture Link System to the HIS/RIS. Information from the HIS/RIS is available to all Consoles and ROPs on the Capture Link System.

Patient and exam queries from any Console or ROP are directed to the Capture Link Server and

•

•

then to the HIS/RIS as necessary. Information returned from the Query is stored on the Server and is available to all other Consoles and ROPs.

The Capture Link Server polls the Work List for new data.

For best overall performance, configure exact queries of the DICOM Work List (queries by patient name, patient ID, or accession number) whenever possible.

•

•

See also:

Entering Data with the Capture Link System Image Review with the Capture Link System Multi-format Printing with the Capture Link System


208/454

5/22/2018


Capture Link System

Entering Data in the Capture Link System Enter data the same way you would on a local CR or DR System. You can see the data you enter at every Console and ROP on the system. When you select Find Study Locally on the Patient Query Screen, the system searches the Capture Link Database to locate the patient record. How does the Patient Input Screen change when I connect to the Capture Link System?

In a Capture Link System, all patients and all images from anywhere on the System are available for review and use anywhere on the system.

The name of the system where the image resides does not appear on the thumbnail of the Image List until after the Modality leaves the Capture Link System. At that time the name appears on the Image List at the Capture Link Server and any Modality joined to the Capture Link.

•

•

See also:

Using the Patient Work List Screen Using the Patient Query Screen


209/454

5/22/2018



Image Review with the Capture Link System You can review all images for an exam at any Console or ROP regardless of where they were acquired. 1. Make sure that the Key Operator has enabled the Console with the Capture Link System option and connected the System to the Capture Link System. 2. Acquire a single patient exam from any CR/DR systems within the Capture Link System. 3. Query the patient, and select the patient from the Patient Work List Screen. All thumbnail images display properly, regardless of where they were acquired. The name of the system where the image resides does not appear on the thumbnail of the Image List until after the Modality leaves the Capture Link System. At that time the name appears on the Image list at the Capture Link server and any modality joined to the Capture Link System. Although the view of the image is shared, the actual image file resides in the local database on the hard drive local database of the CR or DR Console where it was acquired. What should I do if I can't see the image?

If the System cannot connect with the machine that has the image file (the machine is down or network issues prevent a connection), an icon indicates that the image is inaccessible. Make sure that the machine with the image file is available on the network. Make sure that the Capture Link server is available on the network. How can I tell which machine has the image?

The name of the system where the image resides does not appear on the thumbnail of the Image List until after the Modality leaves the Capture Link System. Then the name appears on the Image List at the Capture Link Server and any Modality joined to the Capture Link System. How long does it take to retrieve the images with Capture Link?

Depending on network performance, the image retrieval time may be slower than retrieving an image from Standalone mode. See also:

Using the Capture Link System Changing Image Processing


210/454

5/22/2018


Capture Link System

Multi-format Printing with the Capture Link System You can create a multi-format print for an exam where the images have been acquired from multiple Systems. 1. Make sure that the Key Operator has enabled the Console with the Capture Link System option and connected the System to the Capture Link System. 2. Acquire a single patient exam on different CR/DR systems within the Capture Link System. 3. Query the patient, and select from the Patient Work List screen the patient that has images acquired on multiple CR/DR systems. All thumbnail images are displayed properly (images retrieved from the different systems from where they were acquired). Each thumbnail indicates where the image is located. 4. Select the Multi-format Print icon. 5. At the Multi-format Configuration Screen, add images from multiple Systems to create a multi-format print. How long does it take to print a multi-format print from the Capture Link System?

It only takes a few seconds; not much longer than printing from Standalone mode. Why can't I see the image?

If the System cannot reach the machine where the image was acquired (machine down or network issues), an icon indicates that the image cannot be viewed. When you attempt to deliver the print, a delivery error appears if the image cannot be retrieved from the remote machine. See also:

Using the Capture Link System


211/454

5/22/2018



Scanning Long-Length Images (LLI) on the Capture Link System CR Systems and DR Systems behave differently when processing LLI on the Capture Link System. See the DR Capture Link Online Help for more information about working with DR LLI. You can scan multiple CR Cassettes on multiple systems to reduce scanning time, and process the individual cassettes by stitching them together automatically. This workflow reduces the time to stitch the Long-Length image for review and delivery. Make sure that the Key Operator enables the Capture Link System option at the CR Systems. 1. Scan the cassette bar-codes. 2. Perform the exam. 3. Scan the cassettes on one or more machines in the Capture Link System. When the last image is acquired, stitching occurs at the machine where the first long-length cassette in the study was scanned. The image is stitched as soon as the last image is scanned, and is available for review at any Console or ROP on the Capture Link System. How long does it take to create a stitched image with Capture Link? Stitching starts as soon as the last cassette is scanned. For best workflow, scan all cassettes in parallel on various machines. See also:

Introducing the Capture Link System


212/454

5/22/2018


Capture Link System

Capture Link System Communications

Image Recovery on the Capture Link System When the Modality is configured for the Capture Link System but is not yet joined, it is in Standalone Standalone mode. A console fullyCapture functional in Server mode. You can operate Modality in Standalone mode is if the Link becomes unavailable and the a

individual Modality remains joined. If the Modality is no longer joined to the Capture Link Server, you do not lose access to the images that are located on the hard drive of each Console. However, the link between the image and its patient/exam data is broken, and must be restored before the image can be reviewed or delivered. To restore the link between an image and its patient/exam data when the machine has switched to Standalone mode:

1. From the Main Menu, select Utilities and Image Recovery. The following data appears in a row for each image: Accession Number

•

•

Patient ID

Acquisition Date and Time

•

•

View Name

2.

Select the row(s) that represent the images you are looking for.

3.

Select Recover Checked Images. The Modality attempts to associate the image to a patient/exam. If the Modality cannot automatically associate the image to a patient/exam, the image will be unassigned.

See Assigning an Image For unassigned images, 1. Re-create the patient/exam image record (Query the local or remote Work List or enter data manually at the Patient Input Screen). 2. Assign the image to the patient and exam. 3. The data listed above appears in a row for each image. To restore the association between an image and its patient/exam data when the machine has returned to Capture Link Mode select Main Menu > Utilities:

See:Image Recovery to Capture Link 1. Use the filters to select the images in the system: All Studies, Need Approval, Unassigned Images, Failed Delivery, Pending Delivery, Need Destination, or Delivered Images. You can sort by Patient Last Name, Patient ID, Accession Number, Tech ID, or Acquisition Date.


213/454

5/22/2018



If you are in a Standalone mode and then join the Capture Link System, an image on your system will not be visible or accessible unless you use the Image Recovery to Capture Link utility. The recovered image is retrieved but unassigned to a patient/exam record if there is no match of the Accession Number and Patient ID. 2. Select the image. 3. Selecta patient record from the RIS or create one manually. 4. Assign the image. See also:

Rejoining the Capture Link System Re-delivering an Image Using Image Recovery to Capture Link List


214/454

5/22/2018


Capture Link System

Rejoining the Capture Link System If you left the Capture Link System and wish to rejoin: 1. Select the Quick menu in the lower left corner of the screen. 2. Select Shutdown. 3. Select Join Capture Link Server after Restart. 4. Select Reboot. The system will restart and reconnect to the Capture Link Server. See also:

Image Recovery on the Capture Link System


215/454

5/22/2018



Redelivering an Image When a machine joins the Capture Link System, it cannot access the patient records that were previously captured while in Standalone mode. To avoid this, deliver all images acquired in Standalone mode before connecting to the Capture Link System. A message reminds you to do this before you connect. If a Standalone mode image must be redelivered after reconnection to the Capture Link System, two methods are available. Method 1—Redeliver in Standalone Mode

1. Return the machine to Standalone mode. 2. Select the image(s) from the Image Review list. 3. Redeliver as needed. Method 2—Image Restoration in Capture Link Mode

1. At the Main Menu, select Utilities. 2. Select Image Recovery to Capture Link. 3. Select the row that represents the image you are looking for. 4. Select the image to recover . The image is retrieved but unassigned to a patient/exam record if there is no match of the Accession Number and Patient ID. 5. Recreate a patient exam record for the image. (You may do this with a Query to the local or remote Work List or a manual entry at the Patient Input screen.) 6. Assign the image to the patient and exam. 7. Review the now-assigned image and proceed in the usual manner. The following data appears in a row for each image stored on the machine’s hard drive: Accession Number

•

•

Patient ID


•

View Name

Cassette ID (CR only)

•

•

What happens in Image Recovery?

If you acquired an image while in Capture Link mode, and now operate in Standalone mode (or acquired the image in Standalone mode and are now in Capture Link mode), you are no longer connected to the CR/DR System that owns the image. Image Recovery lets you access the image on the hard drive of the machine that scanned the image. See also:

Image Recovery on the Capture Link System


216/454

5/22/2018


Capture Link System

Using Image Recovery to Capture Link

•

Use the following filters to select the images in the system: All Studies (all that need to be completed)

o

o

Need Approval (studies that are not accepted) Unassigned Images (images not assigned to a patient)

o

Failed Delivery (images that were not delivered)

o

Pending Delivery

o

Need Destination (no destination defined)

o

Delivered Images (all images that have been delivered)

o

•

You can sort by Accession Number, Tech ID, or Acquisition Date.

If you are in a Standalone mode and then join the Capture Link System, images acquired while not part of the Capture Link System will not be visible or accessible unless you use the Image Recovery to Capture Link Utility.

•

If a study exists with the same Patient ID and Accession number, it associates the image with that study. If not, the image is an unassigned image, and the Patient ID and Accession number are placed in the Image Comments field.

See also:

How do I assign an image? Using the Capture Link System


217/454

5/22/2018



Capture Link Configuration Capture Link

Making Preference Editor Changes in the Capture Link System When using the Capture Link System, you may want to change Preference Editor settings while the Modality is joined to the Capture Link Server. The Preference Editor settings for each Modality are recorded by the Server when they are joined. If Image Processing Preference changes were made at the CR 975A in the example below, the changes would be seen there, but the changes would actually exist on the Server. The Server records each Modality's Preference Editor separately. The CR 975B does not see the Preference Editor changes made on the CR 975A. Any images processed on the CR 975B will be processed with the original Preference Editor settings. To transfer the settings from CR 975A to CR

975B:

1. Back up the optional Procedure Mapping and Views component at the CR 975A. 2. Restore the Procedure Mapping settings and Views component at the CR 975 B. The Server records the new CR 975B Preference Editor settings. Restore the optional Procedure Mapping settings and Views from the back up and use the Local Database Only check box to transfer Editor each Modality for when the CR is in Standalone Mode. Youthe canPreference do this while still settings joined toonto the Server.


218/454

5/22/2018


Capture Link System

See also:

Backup and Restore Configurations


219/454

5/22/2018



Capture Link Configuration Screen The Capture Link Configuration Screen lets you do the following by selecting a radio button on the screen:

Disconnect from a Capture Link Server

Connect to a Capture Link Server

Become a Capture Link Mini Custer Server

•

•

•

A Capture Link Mini Cluster Server is a Capture Link System consisting of two modalities, where one of the modalities acts as a Server. See also:

Joining Devices Capture Link System Workflow Using the Capture Link System


220/454

5/22/2018


Capture Link System

Configuring and Connecting a Console or Accessory Device 1. At the Key Operator Functions menu, select Capture Link Configuration. 2. To configure the Console to connect to the Capture Link System, select Connect to a Capture Link Server . 3. Enter the IP address of the Capture Link Server. 4. Select Save Changes. 5. At the Quick Menu in the lower left corner of the screen, select Shutdown. 6. Check Join the Capture Link System after rebooting. 7. Select Reboot.

Capture Link Icons in the application title bar show that the Capture Link System is configured, but the machine is not connected. This is Standalone mode.

The application restarts and is connected to the Capture Link System. The Capture Link Icons in the application title bar turn green to show that the device is connected to the Capture Link System.

The Capture Link Server Status Screen updates to include a new identifying data row for the machine you added.

•

•

•

To view the Capture Link Server Status Screen, from the Main Menu, select Utilities. To configure the Console to disconnect from the Capture Link System, select Disconnect from a Capture Link Server . See also:

Capture Link System Requirements Removing a Console from the Capture Link System


221/454

5/22/2018



Capture Link System Requirements All machines that are linked to a Capture Link System must meet the following requirements:

•

Install KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR Software Version 5.1 or higher in all CR Systems.

•

•

•

•

Install KODAK DIRECTVIEW DR Software Version 5.0 or higher in all DR Systems. Install KODAK DIRECTVIEW System Software Version 5.2 or higher in all systems if joining CR and DR Systems. Connect Computed Radiography (CR) and Digital Radiography (DR) Systems via a Local Area Network (LAN). No common software options are required. A Console can join the Capture Link System at any time.

Machines that run in Standalone mode, adjacent to a Capture Link System, do not have to meet these requirements. See also:

Backup and Restore


222/454

5/22/2018


Capture Link System

Restoring Configurations from the Server to a Standalone Machine The Key Operator can back up the configurations from the Capture Link System and restore them to a CR or DR System for when the machine is in Standalone mode. The machine in Standalone mode will be configured identically to the Capture Link System. 1. At the Key Operator Functions menu, select Backup Restore.

2. Select the Backup/Restore Directory to select a drive to save the Backup to. 3. Select the Select button. 4. Select the items you would like to back up. 5. Select the Backup button. 6. Select Local Database Only and select Restore to save the configurations from the Capture Link System to the local machine. The selected Capture Link System configurations are now available to the machine when it is in Standalone mode. What configurations are restored?

Capture Link System Range of Operation See also:

What Is Standalone Mode?


223/454

5/22/2018



Removing a Console from the Capture Link System To remove a CR or DR Console from the Capture Link System:

1. At the Key Operator Functions menu, select Capture Link Network Configuration. 2. Select Disconnect. The system auto-restarts and resumes operation in Standalone mode.


224/454

5/22/2018


Capture Link System

Troubleshooting the Capture Link System Why can't I enter an IP address in the Capture Link Configuration Screen?

Capture Link is an option that must be purchased and enabled on the Option Registration Screen. If the option is not enabled, you will not be able to enter an IP address or change the mode to connect to a Capture Link Server. Why can't I see my images now that I am connected to the Capture Link System? The images you seek were captured when you were in Standalone mode. Images that were captured in Standalone mode are unavailable when you are connected to the Capture Link System. If the Capture Link System cannot connect with the machine that has the image file (the machine is down or network issues prevent a connection), an icon indicates that the image cannot be viewed, and you will need to check for communication issues. The System checks to see if there are any non-delivered images the local system when you attempt to connect to the Capture Link System, but you must deliver them before you join or those images will not be accessible until you leave Capture Link. See Image Recovery. Identifying the Capture Link Icons The Capture Link Icons may indicate action on your part, or simply a status. See Identifying Icons. How can I tell which machine has the image?

The name of the system where the image resides does not appear on the thumbnail of the Image List until after the Modality leaves the Capture Link System. At that time the name appears on the Image List at the Capture Link Server and any Modality joined to the Capture Link. What happens if the Capture Link Server is unavailable on the hospital network? If your system is configured for and connected to Capture Link and you encounter data network problems, you can switch to Standalone mode. The system will repeatedly attempt to overcome the network problems unless you switch to Standalone mode. Choose an action:

Go into Standalone mode and run independently.

Do not restart in Standalone mode. Wait for the network problems to be resolved, and then reconnect to the Server.

•

•


225/454

5/22/2018



Capture Link Server Help

Capture Link Server Safety and Regulatory EMC Europe

EN 55022:1998+A1:2000 (Class B) Emissions EN 55022:1998+A1:2000 (Class B) Immunity EN 61000-3-2:2000 Harmonics EN 61000-3-3:1995+A1:2001 Flicker U.S. and Canada

CFR 47 part 15 sub B (Class B) Emissions

Safety Standards for Safety of Information Technology Equipment

UL 60950 EN 60950:2000 IEC 60950:1999


226/454

5/22/2018


Capture Link System

Logging On to the Capture Link Server Log on to the Capture Link server the same way you would log in to any Console running KODAK DIRECTVIEW System Software Version 5.1 or higher. See also:

Capture Link Server Safety and Regulatory Using the Capture Link Server


227/454

5/22/2018



Using the Capture Link Server Status Screen The Capture Link Server Status Screen quickly lists what machines are connected to the Capture Link System, or what the network communication statuses of those systems are. To access it, from the Main Menu, select Utilities. To determine which devices are in the Capture Link System: View the Capture Link Server Status Screen list of the names and IP address of each

machine Console and server configured for the Capture Link System. Remote Operations Panels and other external devices are not listed. To determine whether there is a Capture Link connectivity problem:

•

Select Ping Devices. If there is a good connection, the light appears green.

o

If there is a problem with the connection, the light appears red.

o

To determine which types of connections you can check:

•

Network

Application

•

•

Database


228/454

5/22/2018


Capture Link System

Capture Link System

Using the Capture Link Server Log into the Capture Link Server the same way you would log onto a Console. The appearance of the Server Software is similar to an ROP. If the System cannot connect with the machine that has the image file (the machine is down, or network issues prevent a connection) an icon appears that indicates the image cannot be viewed. What can I use the Capture Link Server for?

Besides providing a master database for CR and DR Systems, you can:

You can use the Capture Link Server as another very-capable ROP to review and manage images and patients.

Use the Capture Link Server for patient and image review.

Query images and patients.

Perform QA functions.

Create and update patient information.

•

•

•

•

•

How fast is the Server response for viewing patient and image data?

The performance time of image display should be similar to that of an ROP. See also:

How to Use the Capture Link Server Status Screen How to Recover Images from Capture Link How do I enter data in Capture Link? How do I connect?


229/454

5/22/2018



230/454

5/22/2018


Key Operator Functions Key Operator Functions Menu Select a blue link below for information about the Key Operator Functions. How to Protect or Delete Exam Records Technologist Statistics Destination Summary Statistics Rejected Image List Download Statistics Cassette Statistics Erase Cycles Monitor Configuration Introduction System Configuration Flagged Image List Capture Link Configuration Register and Activate Options Backup and Restore Total Quality Tool CSA Log Viewer


231/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > Backup and Restore Backup and Restore Configurations The Backup and Restore feature provides a mechanism to save and preserve a machine’s configuration settings. You can restore the machine to a prior state following installation of new software or recover from accidental changes in settings. Additionally the Backup and Restore feature is a convenient method of transferring selected configuration information between systems in a department. Because of the unique attributes of different DIRECTVIEW systems, there are some limitations to which configuration information can be transferred between machines. The software automatically restricts the restoration of the configurable items as described in Transferring configuration information to different machines. Because of the unique attributes of different DIRECTVIEW systems, there are some limitations to which configuration information can be transferred between machines. The software automatically restricts the restoration of the configurable items as described in Transferring

Configuration Information. The description identifies the conditions under which selected items can be transferred between machines. Machine to Machine Device Type & Com Port


Machine Model Machine Model Layout Configura tion

to

Same

Image Viewer Editors Markers Editor Patient Input

Settings are restored only to the same machine from which they were backed up. Select the link to view the list of these configuration categories. Model items restored to the same model of machine. (For example, information that is transferred from one CR toElite only be restored otherSystem CR Elitecan Systems.) Select the link to see a listing of these configuration categories.

Patient Names RPDES

Machines Within Same Product Family Image Processing Preference Editor

All Fields

Universal

Configuration information transferred in this category can be transferred from one CR to another CR or from one DR to another DR machine. Select the link to view this list of these configuration categories. You can copy the following items


232/454

5/22/2018


Key Operator Functions

View Configuration

All (except fields that are configured from the Image Processing Preference Editor)

Procedure Mapping Configuration

All Fields

Profile Configuration

All Fields

List Configuration

All Fields

Reject Reasons

All Fields

Trauma Defaults

All Fields


All Fields


All except Device Type and Com Port


All


All

HIS/RIS Poling Remote Query

All Fields

among all CR and DR machines.

and

Regional Configuration

All Fields

Long-Length

All

Configuration s System Maintenance

All

Remote Device Configuration

All Fields


233/454

5/22/2018




All User Configuration s


All Security Configuration


s All Roles Configuration s

Backed-up settings can always be restored to the machine from which they were created. You can back up configurations to a particular drive and restore them to this or another machine. You can back up information to either the machine hard drive or to the removable media suitable to the machine computer (may include CD, DVD, USB, or floppy disk devices).

Backing Up Configurations To back up a configuration:

1. Insert or connect the media to receive the backup file. 2. Select the check boxes of the categories of configuration information that you want to back up, or Select All. 3. Select the Backup/Restore directory to select a Drive to save the backup to. 4. To create a folder for the backup file, select New Folder and enter the folder name. 5. Highlight the folder name and press Select. 6. Select Backup. 7. When the progress bar indicates the transfer is complete, select OK.

Restoring Configurations To restore a configuration:

1. Insert or connect the media to receive the backup file. 2. Select the check boxes of the categories of configuration information that you want to backup, or Select All. 3. Select the Backup/Restore directory to select a Drive to restore the Backup from. 4. Select the folder name of the backup file (if applicable). 5. Select the Select button. 6. Select Restore. 7. When the progress bar indicates the transfer is complete, select OK. To see all of the configurations listed, select the arrows at the right side of the screen.


234/454

5/22/2018



Navigational Buttons Select

Selects the highlighted directory for backup/restore process.

Select All

Selects every configuration for backup or restore process.

Deselect All

Clears the check box for every selection. No configurations are selected.

Backup

Writes the selected configurations and hidden parameters to the selected backup directory.

Restore

Loads the selected configurations, or all configurations if you Select All.

New Folder

Creates a folder on the selected drive to contain the configurations.

Cancel

Aborts the backup or restore process.

Save

Saves the New Folder name.

Main Menu

Exits the current screen and Returns to the system Main Menu.

Back

Returns to the previous screen.


235/454

5/22/2018



Bar-Code Scanner Configuration

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Bar-Code Configuration Programming the Automatic Trigger The Automatic Trigger lets you program the bar-code scanner to be on all of the time, or to be on only when you touch the manual trigger. Scan the bar-code listed for the operational mode you choose. To program the hand-held bar-code reader to its operational mode:

Scan the Automatic Trigger bar-code if you want the scanner on all of the time.

Scan the Manual Trigger bar-code if you want the scanner LEDs off until you touch the trigger.

•

•

See also:

Bar-Code Programming Samples 5 How to Configure a Bar-Code


236/454

5/22/2018



Bar-Code Configuration Menu How to Configure a Bar-Code

Bar-Code Programming


237/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Bar-Code Configuration > Bar-Code Configuration

Bar-Code Configuration 1. On the Bar-Code Configuration Screen, enter the Prefix, Data, and Suffix information. 2. Select Save Changes. 3. At the Bar-Code Configuration menu, select Bar-Code Programming. 4. Select a category of information that displays sample bar-codes. 5. Scan the appropriate bar-code to configure the bar-code scanner for each change. You can configure the bar-code to get the result you desire. The selections you make on the Bar-Code Configuration Screen add or subtract information that is read from the Bar-Code. For example, if the bar-code is a series of characters such as Pid00001-XX and you need to change it to 01, the following three options are available to you on the screen: Field

Strip

Size

Strip

Prefix

Data Size

Strip

Suffix

Patient ID

X

3

X

000

2

X

-

Patient ID

X

6

X

-XX

Patient ID

2 X

Pid000

2

How do I know what will be stripped out?

When you designate Strip, the action is performed from left to right on the Bar-Code Configuration Screen. How do I configure for the other fields?

The rules apply the same way for the Accession Number, Tech ID, and Procedure Code fields. What if all of the fields have the same number of digits?

If the fields contain the same number of digits (Prefix strip size + Data size + Suffix strip size), then the first field name appears in the Test Field. What do I do if the Patient ID is the same length as the Cassette ID?

If there is a conflict with the 10-digit Cassette ID field and a field that is 10 characters in length. 1. Go to Main Menu > Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Bar Code Configuration > > Bar-Code Configuration. 2. Select: Add # to Cassette IDs to make them 11 digits. 3. Select Save Changes


238/454

5/22/2018



4. The You must reprogram the bar-code scanner after changing the Cassette ID Format Must reprogram bar-code scanner Notification pop-up message appears. 5. Select OK.

6. Return to Bar-Code Programming > Prefix& Suffix and reprogram the bar-code reader. See also

How to Strip Middle Characters from a Bar-Code Changing the Prefix and Suffix Bar-Code Configuration Bar-Code Programming Bar-Code Programming Samples


239/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Bar-Code Configuration > Bar-Code Programming

Bar-Code Programming 1. Select the feature you wish to program. 2. Scan the sample bar-code for that feature with the hand-held bar code reader. See also:

Bar-Code Programming Samples Country Code Prefix and Suffix Automatic Trigger Beeper Mode Reread Delay How to Configure a Bar-Code Do not scan the test bar-code more than once. If you scan it twice, it will fail. If you change the Cassette ID format, the country code, or bar code reader prefix or suffix characters, then you must program the Bar-Code Scanner.


240/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Bar-Code Configuration How to Change the Beeper Mode This screen lets you change the sound that the hand-held bar-code scanner makes. 1. Select a volume level and scan the appropriate bar-code.

High (default)

Low

Medium

Off

•

•

•

•

2. Select a tone and scan the appropriate bar-code.

•

Normal Beep (default)

Short Beep If the scan is successful, the scanner will emit a tone. If it is not successful, it will emit a buzzing sound. •

See also:

Bar-Code Programming Samples 7 Bar-Code Programming Samples 5


241/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Bar-Code Configuration How to Change the Cassette ID format If the Cassette ID bar-code format (normally 10 digits in length) conflicts with other bar-codes in use, you can change the bar-code format to an 11-digit format. 1. Select the Add # to Cassette IDs to make them 11 digits check box. 2. Select Save Changes. The You must reprogram the bar code scanner after changing the Cassette ID Format message appears. You must reprogram bar-code scanner when this notification message appears. 3. Select OK 4. Select Back. 5. Select Bar-Code Programming. 6. Select Prefix & Suffix. 7. Scan all of the bar codes on the Add Prefix and Add Suffix pages. See also:

Bar-Code Programming Changing the Prefix and Suffix Bar-Code Programming Samples


242/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Bar-Code Configuration Changing the Country Code The Country Code selection changes the language of the headings on the Bar-Code Programming Screen. A reboot is required to make this setting function properly. 1. On the Bar-Code Configuration Screen, select the Country Code data box. 2. Select the country where the CR or DR System resides. 3. Select Save Changes. 4. Select Back, then select Bar-Code Programming. 5. Select Country Code. 6. Use the bar-code scanner to scan the Country Code, the Country, and the Save bar-codes. 7. Scan the Program Country Code.

Program Country Code 8. Scan the numeric bar-code sample for your country. Country Code

Scan

Country Code

Scan

Belgium

1

Italy

5

Denmark

8

Norway

9

Finland

2

Spain

10

France

3

Switzerland

6

Germany/Austria

4

USA (Default)

0

United Kingdom

7

9. Scan Save to program the keyboard for your country.


243/454

5/22/2018



Save Generally, the following characters are not supported by the scanner for countries other than the U.S.: @| $ # { } [ ] = / ' \ < > ~ You can make all of your changes on the Bar-Code Configuration Screen and then select Save Changes when finished. See also:

Bar-Code Programming Samples How to Configure a Bar-Code


244/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Bar-Code Configuration Changing the Data Field Size 1. On the Bar-Code Configuration Screen, select the Data Size field. 2. Enter the number of characters that you want the data size to be. 3. Select Save Changes. You can make all of your changes on the Bar-Code Configuration Screen and then select Save Changes when finished. See also:



245/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Bar-Code Configuration Changing the Prefix and Suffix Prefixes are characters (up to ten digits) preceding data which serve as mapping keys. Barcodes read into the system containing these prefix characters will populate into the designated field on the Patient Input and Patient Query screens. For example, configuring the Accession Number on the Bar-Code Configuration screen via Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Bar-Code Configuration as such:

Strip enabled (checked)

prefix as "ACN"

Data size of "6."

•

•

•

When you have configured the bar-code (Bar-Code Configuration Screen) so that the Prefix or Suffix is not used, or an alternate prefix and suffix are used, you must program the scanner to use the new configuration instead. How to enter data on the Bar-Code Configuration Screen:

1. For each field, enter the desired Prefix and Suffix Character formats, if any, and set the Data Size field. 2. Select a field and use the keyboard to enter the data. 3. Enter the number of characters you want to accept in the Data Size field. 4. Select Strip if you want to remove the field when it is read by the bar-code scanner. 5. Select Save Changes and then select Back. 6. Select Bar-Code Programming, then select Prefix and Suffix. 7. Scan the Clear all Prefix or Clear all Suffix bar-codes. How to add a prefix or suffix:

1. Scan all of the bar-codes on the Add Prefix or Add Suffix page. 2. Scan the Save bar-code. Leave the Data Size field blank if you want to accept any size data. Test the Cassette ID to ensure that there are no bar-code conflicts. See also:

Bar-Code Programming Samples


246/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Bar-Code Configuration Configuring Reread Delay To configure the time delay allowed between reading the same bar-code, select the following and scan the appropriate bar-code:

Short (default)

Medium

Long

Extra Long

•

•

•

•

This feature is only available in Automatic Trigger Mode. See also:

Trigger Modes Bar-Code Programming Samples 6


247/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Bar-Code Configuration Stripping a Bar-Code Field A bar-code may contain Prefix and Suffix information that must be removed. For example, the bar-code below may be identified as (BNM,/?<12345678<()\+). Prefix

Data

See also:

How to Strip Middle Characters from a Bar-Code How to Configure a Bar-Code Bar-Code Configuration Changing the Data Field Size How to Change the Prefix and Suffix


248/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Bar-Code Configuration Stripping Middle Characters from the Bar-Code You can configure the bar-code to produce the results you desire. When you designate Strip, the action is from left to right on the Bar-Code Configuration Screen.

For example, if the bar-code is a series of characters such as ABC-01752-001 and you need to change it to AC-01752-1, do the following: Field

Strip

Accession Number

Size

Strip

Prefix

Data Size

Strip

Suffix

1

X

B

8

X

00

Legend: Prefix = B Data = AC-01752-1 Suffix = 00 See also:

How to Configure a Bar-Code Using the Bar-Code Configuration Screen Changing the Data Field Size How to Change the Prefix and Suffix


249/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Bar-Code Configuration Using the Bar-Code Configuration Screen The default bar-code that a medical facility uses may not automatically place the patient data in the correct fields on the Patient Input Screen. You can use the Bar-Code Configuration Screen to change the way the bar-code scanner identifies the following: Accession Number

•

Tech ID

Patient ID

Procedure Code

•

•

•

1. Select the bar-code device: USB as Serial

PS2 to USB Keyboard

Serial Scanner

Keyboard Wedge

PS2 Keyboard

None

COM1

COM2

COM3

COM4

COM5

COM6

2. Select the serial COM Port:

3.

Select Save Changes.

The CR or DR system supports the following type of bar-codes:

Code 128

This example of a 128 bar-code indicates a Prefix of -+@# and a data set of 1234567801234. By configuring the bar-code, you can output only the Data portion of the code 1234567801234.

See also:

How to Strip Middle Characters from a Bar-Code How to configure a Bar-Code Bar-Code Programming Programming the Serial Bar-Code Reader


250/454

5/22/2018



Programming PS2 Keyboard Bar-Code Reader Programming the PS2 Keyboard Bar-Code Reader 2 Programming the PS2 to USB Keyboard Bar-Code Reader Programming the PS2 to USB Keyboard Bar-Code Reader 2


251/454

5/22/2018





Program Country Code

Clear All Prefix

Clear All Suffix

Test Code


252/454

5/22/2018



Add Prefix

Add Suffix

< Next >


253/454

5/22/2018



Bar-Code Programming Samples (Page 2)

Number 0

Number 1

Number 2

Number 3

Number 4


254/454

5/22/2018



Number 5

< Previous | Next >


255/454

5/22/2018




Number 6

Number 7

Number 8

Number 9

Save


256/454

5/22/2018



< Previous | Next >


257/454

5/22/2018




Bar-Code A

Bar-Code B

Bar-Code C

Bar-Code D

Bar-Code E


258/454

5/22/2018



Bar-Code F

< Previous | Next >


259/454

5/22/2018




Code 39 Full ASCII On

Automatic Trigger

Beep Tone Normal

Code 39 Full ASCII Off

Manual Trigger


260/454

5/22/2018



Beep Tone Short

< Previous | Next >


261/454

5/22/2018




Reread Delay Short

Reread Delay Medium

Reread Delay Long

Reread Delay Extra Long

< Previous | Next >


262/454

5/22/2018




Beep Volume High

Beep Volume Medium

Beep Volume Low

Beep Volume Off

< Previous >


263/454

5/22/2018



Programming the Keyboard Wedge Bar-Code Reader Scan the bar-codes in the following order: left to right and top to bottom. Standard Defaults

Product

Keyboard Wedge

Add Prefix

9

9

0

4

0

4

0

4

Save


264/454

5/22/2018



Add Suffix

9

9

0

4

0

4

0

4

Save


265/454

5/22/2018



Programming the Keyboard Wedge Bar-Code Reader and Add Suffix Add # to Cassette In addition to them Programming Keyboard Bar-Code , if the IDs to make 11 digitsthe check box is Wedge checked, scan theReader following bar-codes in order (left to

right, top to bottom). This only affects Carestream Health Cassette ID bar-codes, which are Interleaved 2 of 5 bar-code types. Add Suffix

6

5

2

3

0

4

0

4

0

4

Save


266/454

5/22/2018




267/454

5/22/2018



Programming the PS2 Keyboard Bar-Code Reader Scan the bar-codes in the following order: left to right, top to bottom. Standard Product Defaults

Emulate Keyboard

Add Prefix

9

9

0

4

0

4

0

4

Save


268/454

5/22/2018



Add Suffix

9

9

0

4

0

4

Save


269/454

5/22/2018



Programming the PS2 Keyboard Bar-Code Reader and Add Suffix Cassette In addition to Programming the box PS2isKeyboard Reader , ifbar-codes the Add #intoorder to make them 11 digits check checked,Bar-Code scan the following (left toIDs

right, top to bottom). This only affects Carestream Health Cassette ID bar-codes, which are Interleaved 2 of 5 bar-code types. Add Suffix

6

5

2

3

0

4

0

4

0

4

Save


270/454

5/22/2018




271/454

5/22/2018



Programming the PS2 to USB Keyboard Bar-Code Reader Scan the bar-codes in the following order: left to right, top to bottom. Standard Product Defaults

Emulate Keyboard

Add Prefix

9

9

5

B

Save

Add Suffix

9

9

5


272/454

5/22/2018



D

Save


273/454

5/22/2018



Programming the PS2 to USB Keyboard Bar-Code Reader and Add Suffix to In additionIDs to Programming the to USB Keyboard Bar-Code Reader , if the Add Cassette to make them 11PS2 digits check box is checked, scan the following bar-codes in

order (left to right, top to bottom). This only affects Carestream Health Cassette ID bar-codes, which are Interleaved 2 of 5 bar-code types. Add Suffix

6

5

2

3

5

D

Save


274/454

5/22/2018



Programming the Serial Scanner Bar-Code Reader The Serial Bar-Code Reader must have two connectors: one for the serial port and one for power (such as a PS2 connector). 1. Scan the following bar-codes left to right, top to bottom. Standard

Product

Defaults

Serial Port

9600 Baud, 7 Data Bits, 1 Stop Bit, Even Parity

Add # to Cassette IDs to make them 11 digits check box is checked, scan the following 2. bar If the code.

Add # Suffix for Interleaved 2 of 5 via Data Formatter


275/454

5/22/2018



Programming the USB as Serial Bar-Code Reader 1. Scan the bar-codes in the following order: Standard Product Defaults

USB Emulating Serial Port

2. If the Add # to Cassette IDs to make them 11 digits check box is checked, scan the following bar-code. Add #Suffix for Interleaved 2 of 5 via Data Formatter


276/454

5/22/2018



HIS/RIS Communications Configuration

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > HIS/RIS Configuration How to Configure for a Polling Query A polling query lets the CR System communicate with the Radiology Information System (RIS), to display the patient Work List. You can also query the RIS for individual patients. To configure a Polling Query:

1. Set up the type of query and interval to the PACS Broker: HIS/RIS Polling Query 2. Modify HIS/RIS Options:

HIS/RIS Options

HIS/RIS Options At the Key Operator Functions menu, select System Configuration, HIS/RIS Broker Configuration, and then select HIS/RIS Options.

PACS Common Configuration HIS/RIS AE Title

Broker Name, normally BROKER

HIS/RIS IP Address

PACS Broker IP Address

HIS/RIS Port

PACS Broker Port, normally 3320

Enter the information for your system and select Save Changes.

Other HIS/RIS Options 1. Select the check box to automatically delete canceled studies from the system when the status is Cancelled. 2. Select the check box again to clear it if you do not want this action. 3. Select the check box to send the Scheduled Workflow MPPS Command (optional feature). The selection for the following list is determined by the Procedure Mapping configuration of the HIS/RIS Broker. To change selections, the Broker must be reconfigured.

HIS/RIS Procedure Mapping DICOM Field Name

DICOM Tag

Requested Procedure Sequence

Code


277/454

5/22/2018



Procedure ID

(0040, 1001)

NA

Procedure Code

(0032,1064)

(0008, 0100)

Scheduled Procedure Step Sequence,

(0040, 0100)

(0008, 0100)

(0040, 0008)

Performed Protocol Code Sequence

The purpose of this screen is to select which RIS is used with CR Procedure Mapping. If you enable your system for Scheduled Workflow, PerformedProtocol Code is selected automatically, and is not configurable.

Navigation Buttons Main Menu

Exits the current screen and returns you to the system Main Menu.

Back


See also:

HIS/RIS Polling Query HIS/RIS Configuration See also:

HIS/RIS Configuration


278/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > HIS/RIS Configuration > HIS/RIS Polling and Remote Query

HIS/RIS Polling Query The KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR and DR Systems utilize DICOM Work List Management to receive study information from the hospital’s HIS/RIS. The Remote Query, Polling, and Options Tabs let you set up your System to communicate with the HIS/RIS in any combination of the tables in the following links:

Remote Query Remote Query Active

Select to permit a Query of the HIS/RIS from the CR or DR System.

Modality

Select the modality: CR, DX, RT, All

Filter by Station Name

Select either Station Name or AE Title to filter the information. Only records that contain matching data in these fields appear.

Filter by AE Title

Select either Station Name or AE Title to filter the information. Only records that contain matching data in these fields appear.

Station Name/AE Title

Enter your station names or AE Title. The system retrieves records that contain only the names specified.

The system sends an immediate request for records to the hospital's HIS/RIS system, queried from the Patient Query Screen.

Polling Poll Model Active

Select to activate Polling Configuration.

Modality

Select the modality: CR, DX, RT, All

Filter by Station Name

Select either Station Name or AE Title to filter the information. Only records that contain matching data in

Filter by AE Title

Station Name/AE Title

these fields appear. Select either Station Name or AE Title to filter the information. Only records that contain matching data in these fields appear. Enter your station names or AE Title. The system retrieves records that contain only the names specified.


279/454

5/22/2018



The System requests records at a defined interval, filtered by modality, station name, A/E title, and date and time. Carestream Health recommends approximately 100 records per poll.

Polling Interval Hours Before Current Time. •

Hours After Current Time.

Minutes Between Search Updates.

•

•

Initial search time: (default is ± 12 hours from the current time, range 1 - 48 hours). Only records that have a date and time that falls in this range appear.


280/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Customizable Field Description How to Change Field Descriptions To change the dialect used in the User Interface:

To add or change a dialect or change the field descriptions that appear in the CR or DR interface: 1. Select the phrase that appears in the Translation column. 2. Select the Customized Translation column on the right side. 3. Retype the phrase. 4. Select Enter . 5. Select Save Changes.

Navigation Buttons Save Changes

Completes the action by writing changes to the local database.

Main Menu


Back



281/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Long-Length Configuration Long-Length Imaging Configuration Long-Length Configuration for CR Systems lets you enter the Source to Image Distance for vertical and portable cassettes. You can also select a delivery method:

Deliver only the composite image

Inspect composite images before delivery

Deliver composite images without inspection

•

•

•

Required Source to Image (SID) values

•

•

•

For Long-Length Vertical Cassette Holder, a value from 152 cm to 229 cm (60 in. to 90 in.) is recommended. For Long-Length Portable Cassette (supine), a value of 59 in. (150 cm) is recommended. For Long-Length Portable Cassette (erect), a value of 59 in. (150 cm) is recommended.

To configure for Long-length Imaging:

1. Enter the SID value for the cassette(s) you will be using. 2. Select the check box if you want all sub-images automatically marked as delivered after the composite image is complete. The sub-images are not actually delivered. 3. Select the radio button for the image processing mode you desire: QA mode or Pass-Through Mode for the composite image. 4. Select Save Changes. QA Mode: Delivers composite images after inspection. Pass-through Mode: Delivers composite images automatically without inspection.



Main Menu


Back



282/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > System Maintenance Setting the Limits for Image Retention The System Maintenance Screen lets you set high and low limits for use of disk space, balancing between performance and image retention. This screen lets you determine the criteria used by the system to automatically erase images or delete patient records. Disk High Water Mark

Disk High Water Mark is set for optimum performance at installation.

Enter the percentage of disk space to allow before automatic cleanup occurs.

80% is recommended. Disk Low Water Mark

Disk Mark is set Low forWateroptimum performance at installation.

Enter percentage of disk the space that you want the clean-up to reach.

75% is recommended. Maximum Rejected Images Allowed

Retaining rejected images is optional. The number of rejected images stored affects the total number of available images in the

Patient Record Delete Age

system. Permits retention of patient information without patient images.

Enter the maximum number of rejected images to allow in the system before deleting.

Enter the number of days a patient record can remain on the system before deleting.

1. At the Key Operator Functions menu, select System Configuration. 2. Select System Maintenance. 3. Enter the value in each field from the keyboard. 4. Select Save Changes.


283/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Color Preferences Color Preferences Configuration The color groups are divided as follows: All Colors

•

Status Colors

General Application Colors

•

•

To change the colors of the interface:

1. Select the radio button of the color group at the top of the screen. 2. Make a selection from the Description column that you want to give a different color to. 3. Select the color from the Color Tab or the full-range Color Palette Tab. 4. Select Save Changes. Select all of the color changes and then select Save Changes when you are finished. You can view the colors that have already been used by selecting the Used Colors Tab. Select Reset to reset the list. Select

to reset the color to the factory default.

You can select a general, overall color scheme for buttons and backgrounds to save time. At the bottom of the screen select either Apply Gray Theme or Apply Blue Theme in order to automatically select a color-coordinated palette for common groups of preferences. For a quick reference to the palette you are using, select Colors in Use. These palettes will clearly display the colors that are designated within your system.

Navigational Buttons Save Changes

Completes the action by writing the information to the local database.

Main Menu


Back



284/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Delivery Preferences Delivery Preferences Configuration Delivery Preferences lets you set the defaults for information delivery. Hospital Name

Determines the Hospital Name that you want to associate with the images.

Hospital Address

Names the address of the hospital that you want to associate with the images.

Operating Mode

Selects the default operating mode: QA mode Auto Display Pass-Through Mode QA by Study (DR)

Pixel Spacing

Selects pixel spacing for workstations that require the (0018, 1164) Imager Pixel Spacing and require the (0028, 0030) Pixel Spacing field.

Uppercase for all DICOM fields

Selects the DICOM header to appear in all capital letters by default.

Delivery Mode

Determines whether the film delivery will be: Best Use of Film (allows for a counter-clockwise 90-degree

rotation when placing the image on the film. Best Use of Film provides a larger image size (maximizing film usage) Shrink to Fit (does not allow this extra rotation). Select the Shrink to Fit check box if images are rotated when printing multiple images on a single film. Send patient orientation DICOM tag (0020:0020) using L/F

Sends all images in L/F orientation. This means the workstation will not rotate the image when it is received.

Use CR IOD

Prevents an error when determining if DX or MG is supported. It means always use the CR DICOM IOD, instead of DX or MG IOD. Previous product always sent images in the CR image space. DX IOD has many extra DICOM tags, but not all workstations can understand DX. In that case, CR IOD is used by default.

Translate Body Part and Projection

Provides a choice to translate body part and projection, or leave in English.


285/454

5/22/2018



Delivery Preferences lets you select the general image instance number:

Every image is its own Series. Instance Number is always 1.

Every image is its own Series. Instance Number is unique.

•

•

•

Every image is in the same Series. Instance Number is unique. The Image Instance Tab has different configurations to help with hanging protocols at the PACS. Consult your PACS Administrator to determine which setting is required for your PACS system. See also:

Storage Commitment Support QA Mode Pass-through Mode


286/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Display Configuration Display Configuration Display Configuration lets you customize the way data displays on the Patient Query, Patient Input, and other screens.

To speed up data entry, make the following changes to the default display on these screens. Patient Screen

Query

Use the radio button to select the Result Sort Order or the results of how a remote or local query would be sorted by default. Alphabetical Oldest First Newest First Select which field contains the cursor when the Patient Query Screen is first displayed. Patient ID Accession Number Patient Last Name Patient Query Defaults lets you set the defaults on the Patient Query Screen. Study Status Values

Scheduled Arrived Started Scheduled/Arrived/Started Scheduled/Arrived Completed Failed Update Cancelled All

Time Window

Today Today-Tomorrow Yesterday-Tomorrow Past Week-Tomorrow


287/454

5/22/2018



Unrestricted Modality

CR DX RT All Patient Screen

Input

Select the output of images based on the workflow you use. Procedure Step or New Study Creation. Create new Procedure Steps from Patient Input. A Study Instance Unique Identifier (SIUID) and a New Procedure Step are generated each time you select New Procedure Step for that patient. Create new Studies from the Patient Input Screen. Select the way the Profiles will be applied in the workflow. Profile change applies to current step only. Profile change applies to all incomplete steps for this patient. Require confirmation to end a Procedure Step. A pop-up message will appear if this option is selected. After accepting all images in one or more procedure steps or studies, set the status to Completed. Auto-populate Tech ID with logged-in user. Auto-populate the Tech ID field with the logged-in user. Display Tutor image. Select the check box to allow when the Query panel can be used on the Patient Input Screen. Always When the image has been delivered When the Study has been started

Other

Image Viewer Options Display ID Window -Select to display the ID window on the image Viewer Screen. You can use this to identify the orientation of the cassette during the exposure. Adjust the size of the Region of Interest (ROI) box that appears in the Preference Editor .

Keyboard Clicks Allows an audible "click" when a virtual keypad is selected.


288/454

5/22/2018



Audio Volume Set the speaker volume by moving the slider control. Blue Tint Use the slider control to set the amount of blue tint to add to images Patient Link

displayed on the CR, DR, or ROP. Fast Patient Switching Patient Link Enabled - This allows you to select patients from the Quick menu for faster access. Repeat Patients Number of shortcuts Enter the number of shortcuts allowed Button Sort Order Most recently accessed appears at the top of the list Most recently accessed appears at the bottom of the list


289/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > Flagged Image Harvesting Flagged Images The Flagged Image List provides a quick and easy way to export images from the system for further evaluation. The Flagged Image List looks very much like the Image List. You can search the list using the bar-code scanner to input Patient Name, Patient ID, Accession Number, Tech ID, or Acquisition Date (or enter manually). Place checks in the check boxes on the list to indicate which images you want to harvest.

Flagged Image List Controls Quick Menu

Provides a quick access to functions such as logout, shutdown, and special interest features.

Select All

Selects all available items that are listed after one of the filter categories have been applied.

Clear Fields

Clears all of the criteria that has been entered to locate a patient. Checked

Sends a copy of the image to a removable disk for further evaluation.

Unflag Selected Image

Removes the status of flagged image from any selected images.

Main Menu

Returns you to the CR Main Menu screen, exiting the Flagged Image List.

Back

Returns you to the previous function or page. Creates a new folder to send the harvested images to.

Harvest Images

New Folder Select

Highlights the destination folder and then directs the images.

To harvest images:

1. Filter the list using the search filters: All Images

•

•

•

Flagged Images Rejected Images

2. Use the check boxes to the left of each thumbnail to select the image of interest, or Select All images. 3. Select Harvest all Checked Images. 4. Select a destination directory. 5. Select the Select button.


290/454

5/22/2018



A transfer icon appears at the top of the screen to indicate that the transfer is in progress. The icon disappears when the transfer is complete and a pop-up message confirms that the harvest was successful. For any image you can remove all protected health data by selecting the Remove PHI data (Protected Health Information) check box. Select the Unflag the Image after Harvesting check box to return the image to the workflow. To harvest images to a CD/DVD: 1. Filter the list with the search filters described above. 2. Use the check boxes to the left of each thumbnail to select the image of interest, or Select All images. 3. Select Harvest all Checked Images. 4. Select a destination directory. 5. Select CD ROM. 6. Select Select. To change the destination:

When you select Harvest Checked Images, a screen appears for you to select the destination directory. 1. Select the directory pull-down menu to see available directories. You can select New Folder and give it a name. 2. Highlight the folder you want and then select Select. The selected images are copied there.

Why Didn't My Images Transfer? Images cannot be harvested if enough space is not available on the destination drive. The total space required and the spacedrive are reported on the If the images did not transfer, make room on available the destination and harvest thescreen. files again.


291/454

5/22/2018



Monitor Calibration

Key Operator Functions > Monitor Calibration Monitor Calibration Introduction Monitor Calibration checks the D-Max and color values and calibrates the monitor to provide a consistent viewing standard so that images display the same way throughout your system.

•

Perform only the following two tests: Luminance Tracking: This test computes an index for each video display and tells how well the video system matches a specific luminance response model. Tracking checks a computed index, the white level, the black level, and luminance values for red, green, and blue primaries.

o

Luminance Gamma Correction: Corrects in conformance with the DICOM Part 14 Grayscale Standard Display Function or other gamma models for your system.

o

•

Required equipment: o All Monitors for CR or DR Systems, and Remote Operations Panels The VERILUM CHROMA Photometer

o

Perform these tests with a low level of ambient light.

Perform these tests at the following intervals:

•

•

Measure the Luminance for Tracking every 2 to 4 weeks

o

Measure the Luminance for Gamma every 3 months

o

Why Can't I Start the Test? The test targets may be grayed out. On the bottom of the VERILUM Main Menu, the message "cannot open pod or determine pod type" may appear. The pod must be plugged into a USB port before you start the application.

•

Return to the Key Operator System Configuration menu, plug in the pod, and select Monitor Configuration again.

See also:

How Do I Order a VERILUM CHROMA 5 Pod? How Do I Calibrate the Monitor? How Do I Measure the Luminance for Gamma? How Do I Measure the Luminance for Tracking? Monitor Configuration How to Calibrate the Touch-screen


292/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > Monitor Configuration Display Pro for General Radiography The Display Pro test target provides a visual check for monitor calibration. To use the test target:

1. View the top row of density patches on your monitor. You should be able to distinguish the rectangles along the top row of wedges. Do not use this Help screen to evaluate your monitor. 2. View the targets in the row labeled Contrast Targets for Visual Evaluation. If you can see contrast between the light and dark circular half-moon patterns within all of the patches on the top row, the monitor is calibrated as expected. If you cannot see circular patterns in all of the patches, calibrate the monitor . The lower set of patches labeled Density Steps for Measurement and Objective Evaluation are used for evaluation by your Service Representative. You can send the Display Pro image to evaluate the calibration of a PACS workstation or to evaluate the performance of a printer. The printed Display Pro image represents the same measurement of visual confirmation as it does when viewed on the monitor.

.


293/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > Monitor Configuration SMPTE Test Target Check the SMPTE test pattern on the Monitor Configuration Screen before and after testing Luminance for Tracking and Luminance for Gamma. You should see a 5% contrast difference in the two squares shown below with a red outline on the SMPTE test pattern.


294/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > Monitor Configuration Monitor Calibration 1. Adjust the room lighting to a low level of ambient light. 2. Plug in the VERILUM CHROMA 5 Photometer . 3. Place the pod face down on a dark, opaque surface for a few seconds. 4. At the Monitor Configuration Screen, select Photometer Calibration. See How to Measure Luminance Response for Gamma. See How to Measure Luminance Response for Tracking.

Why Can't I Start the Test? The pod must be plugged into a USB port before you start the application.

•

Return to the Key Operator System Configuration menu, plug in the pod, and select Monitor Configuration again.

See also:

Monitor Calibration Introduction Monitor Configuration Screen


295/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > Monitor Configuration > Touch-Screen Calibration Touch-screen Calibration Once calibrated properly, a monitor's touch-screen should not need to be recalibrated for the remaining life of the monitor. 1. From a position directly viewing the monitor, with your finger, select and release each of the three red targets as they appear on the screen. 2. Select and drag your finger across the screen to check the cursor's response. 3. Select OK if the cursor follows your finger, or select Return to repeat the calibration process. 4. When the calibration is complete, select OK to return to the interface. Caution! Selecting the screen in areas other than the red targets may cause the screen to behave in an unpredictable manner.

If the calibration times out, and no changes are made, the system remains at the current calibration.

Why Can't I Get to the Calibration Screen? The touch-screen calibration program guides you through a careful calibration process so the cursor will respond precisely to a precise selection on the interface. If you cannot get to the monitor calibration screen or select the test targets, try accessing the screen with the mouse. If the touch-screen cannot be accessed because it has been put far out of calibration, call Service.


296/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > Monitor configuration Measuring Luminance for Tracking 1. Place the VERILUM CHROMA 5 Photometer in the center of the square target. 2. Select Continue. 3. Hold the pod gently in place until the test progress reaches 17. A graph signifies the end of the test. 4. Select Close. Always hold the pod gently in the center of the target. Do not press too hard! Do not save the information to a MACBETH Color Chart. Luminance for Tracking is a black-andwhite test. See also:

Monitor Calibration Introduction Measuring Luminance for Gamma Monitor Calibration


297/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > Monitor Configuration Measuring Luminance for Gamma 1. Place the VERILUM CHROMA 5 Photometer in the center of the square target. 2. Select Continue. 3. Hold the pod firmly in place until the test progress indicator reaches 33. 4. Select Close. Always hold the pod gently in the center of the target. Do not press too hard! See also:

Monitor Calibration Introduction Measuring Luminance for Tracking


298/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > Monitor Configuration How to Order a VERILUM CHROMA 5 Photometer To obtain a VERILUM CHROMA 5 Photometer (required), go to the Web site: http://www.image-smiths.com. The product is VERILUM V5.2 Software with CHROMA 5 Pod. You do not need to install the software on the Modality in order to use the photometer.


299/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Regional Configuration Regional Configuration To customize the display on the modality for your region: Select:

Change:

Change using:

Language

The language that the system will display

Multi-lingual international keyboard.

Time Zone

The time zone that the modality resides in

International Time Zone keyboard.

Date Format

Default/MM/DD/YYYY;DD/MM/YYYY;YYYY/MM/DD

Radio button selection.

Calendar

Gregorian

Check if yes; clear if no.

Military Time

Check box

Check if yes, clear if no.

Decimal Separator

Preferred symbol to separate decimal for your region

Select from alphanumeric keyboard.

Data Separator

Preferred symbol to separate data, such as the period, forward slash, comma, etc.( . / , )


Time Separator

Preferred symbol to separate time, such as the colon ( :)


Current Date

Enter the current date

Enter from numeric keyboard.

Current Time

Enter the current time

Enter from numeric keyboard.


300/454

5/22/2018



System Configuration

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Layout Configuration Layout Configuration Layout Configuration lets you configure the layout of:

Image Viewer Editors

Markers Editors

Patient Input Screen

Patient Names

Remote Patient Data Entry System

•

•

•

•

•

The Key Operator can select the layout of key screens when configuring the organization of feature display. To make layout changes:

Image Editors

Viewer

Add, remove, or reorder the editors in the Image Viewer to enhance your workflow.

The Image Viewer Editors Screen is divided into two parts. The portion on the left is labeled Disabled Editors. The portion on the right is labeled Enabled Editors. The list of Editors consists of all of the features that appear on the Image Viewer Screen. To change the order of the editors:

1. Select an Editor from the Enabled Editors list. The Editor will be highlighted when selected. 2. Select the arrows to the right of the list to move the Editor to another position. The arrows on the far right move the


301/454

5/22/2018



selected Editor to the top or bottom of the list 3. Select Save Changes. This selection moves the position of the Editor on the Image Viewer Screen. To remove an editor from the Image Viewer Screen:

1. Select an Editor from the Enabled Editors list. The Editor will be highlighted when selected. 2. Select the arrow to the bottom of the list to move the Editor to the Disabled Editors List. The arrows on the bottom move the selected Editor to the left or right of the list. 3. Select Save Changes. This selection moves the position of the Editor from the Image Viewer Screen.

Patient Screen

Input

Select the name of the layout format to see the samples in the blue link.

Patient Input Screen Layout Samples Select the blue link from the table below to view the appearance of the sample layout. Exclude Location and

Hospital Default with


302/454

5/22/2018



Priority

Multi-byte Name

Exclude Middle Name,

Simplified with Multi-byte

Location, and Priority

Name

Hospital Default with Middle Name

MP Controls with Patient Data

Hospital Default without Middle Name

Simplified Data with Patient Age

Markers Editor The Markers Editor lets you customize the marker palette on the Image Viewer Screen.

Change existing layouts of Marker groups. Design your own markers.

Add a marker before

•

the selected column. •

Add a new row above a

selected marker.

Add a new row below a

•

selected marker. Add a marker after a

•

selected column.

Change the order the markers display.

Select a transparent background for Text

•

•

Markers. To add a marker to an existing Marker group:

1. Select a group icon such as Favorites. 2. Select a marker on the palette.


303/454

5/22/2018



The marker is highlighted. 3. Select from the control tabs at the right of the palette, such as Add Marker before Column. 4. Enter the marker label in the Free Form Text field. 5. Save Changes. 6. The new marker appears. If you accidentally deleted a marker, such as the arrow or Right or Left Marker marker, theselect Images select Tab and a replacement.

Selecting the yellow triangle opens a blank palette that you can fill with markers of your choice. The palette is limited to 5 rows across and 6 rows down. To reset any palette to its original condition, select Restore Factory Defaults. Remote Patient Data Entry System (RPDES)

Use the Default setting unless your region specifies the need to support Multi-byte Names.

Patient Names

Select the radio button for Single Byte Names or Single and Multiple Byte Names.


304/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > List Configuration List Configuration To create a list that the radiographer can pick from when entering data:

1. In Key Operator > System Configuration > List Configuration, select a list name: Department Name, Referring Physician, or Tech ID. 2. Select New Tab. 3. Select the Tab size based on the number of items you want in the list. 4. Select a button and enter the name in edit mode. 5. Select the Color Tab and select a color. 6. Select Save Changes. Make that you place the button on the tab you want. You cannot move a button from one tab to sure another. You can enter five tabs of 40 entries, or 200 items per list. You can also change the title and color of the tab label.

Navigation Buttons New Tab

Select the matrix size based on the number of items you will have in your list. Choose from 4 x 5, 5 x 5, 6 x 5, 7 x 5, 8 x 5. You can enter up to five tabs of data per list.

Delete Tab

Deletes the tab of information from the list. A prompt asks you if you are sure. There is no recovery from deleting a tab.

Show Button

Displays the button in the list in the interface. Toggles to Hide Button.

Hide Button

Hides the button display on the interface. Toggles to Show Button.

Main Menu

Exits the current screen and Returns to the system Main Menu.

Back


To change button colors or move buttons on a tab:

•

Use the Tab Controls that appear at the bottom of the screen: Keyboard

The keyboard becomes active when you select a button. The button becomes active for editing. Type the information from the keyboard.

Color

Lets you select the colors of the buttons from over 200 individual colors. Select the color you desire.

Color Palette

Lets you select from a full color palette of blended hues.


305/454

5/22/2018



Move

Lets you move the button to another position on the tab. "Move" does not let you move the button to another tab.


306/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Procedure Mapping Configuration Procedure Mapping Configuration (optional) Use Procedure Mapping to save data entry time on the Patient Input Screen and add consistency to procedure preparation.

Procedure Mapping lets the Key Operator associate a set of Views with a particular Procedure Name or code.

Studies that come from a HIS/RIS select a procedure that matches a code.

The radiographer can select a procedure manually using the procedure keyboard.

The procedures are categorized so that they are easy to locate, even when there are thousands to choose from.

•

•

•

•

To set up pre-defined procedures:

1. Choose an existing Region, or Select Add, then enter a Region. For example, Thorax, Spine, Upper extremity, Lower extremity. 2. Choose an existing exam, or Select Add, then enter an Exam. For example, Adult Chest, Pediatric Chest, Sternum, Ribs. 3. You can modify an existing Procedure Name (by selecting Turn Edit On) or select Add, then enter a procedure name. 4. Enter a Procedure Code to match the code sent by the HIS/RIS in the Procedure Code field on the Patient Input Screen. This will automatically populate the views when selecting a patient record. 5. You can select a Destination Profile. However, you should leave this field blank for the CR modality. 6. Save Changes.

7. Select Add in the Views box, then enter the desired Views for the procedure. You can add Views from different categories. Select Delete to remove highlighted Views from a procedure. Use the second column of arrows (located to the right of the Views) to rearrange the order in which the Views display at the Patient Input Screen. The top View will display first at the Patient Input Screen. To delete a procedure:

•

Go to Procedure Mapping to delete a procedure.

To define Views to use with Procedure Mapping:

•

View Configuration lets you add, delete, and modify views for use in procedure mapping.

Navigation Buttons Change Configuration

Multi-format

Lets you add a multi-format configuration to the procedure, such as 2-up lengthwise to 4-up


307/454

5/22/2018



crosswise. Change View Configuration

Quick access to View Configuration. Lets you add, delete, and modify views for use in procedure mapping. Select the Back button in View Configuration to return to Procedure Mapping.

Turn Edit On

Lets you edit the procedure. Select this button to make changes such as name, category (body part, position) procedure code, destination, auto position.

Save Changes


Main Menu


Back


See also:

Using the Multi-format Configuration Screen


308/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Reject Reason Configuration Reject Reasons Configuration This option lets you build a total list of 10 Reject Reasons that a radiographer can choose from when rejecting an image. To create a list of Reject Reasons:

1. From Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Reject Reasons. 2. Select Add Reject Reason. 3. Type the Reject Reason and select Enter . 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each Reject Reason. 5. Select Save Changes. To create the maximum number of Reject Reasons: You can create up to nine Reject Reasons. The 10th reason is listed as Other Reason, which can be renamed but not deleted. The following default reasons may be used or deleted:

Clipped Anatomy

Motion

Positioning Error

•

•

•

Artifact

•

Technique

Duplicate

Test/Service/Blank

•

•

•

To delete a Reject Reason:

Select the reject reason, and then select Delete Reject Reason. To create statistics of Reject Reasons:

If the Track Rejects button is not selected, no prompt for the reject reason is provided.

•

Select the Track Rejects check box to enable the radiographer to select a reject reason.


Completes the action and writes the data to the system database.

Main Menu


Cancel

Returns you to the previous function without changing to another screen.


309/454

5/22/2018



The Cancel button toggles to the Back button after you have selected Save Changes. The Cancel button displays the Confirm changes confirmation dialog. It does not immediately leave the screen.


310/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Required Fields Required Fields Configuration To make sure that certain radiographers fill in the appropriate fields, you should configure those fields so the radiographer must fill them in before the exam can be delivered. The Required Fields Configuration screen lets you determine which fields must be filled in on the Patient Input Screen before an exam is submitted or delivered.

You can set required fields for delivery to mandatory destinations, such as archives, or for submitting exam/patient information. For example, you may want to make Tech ID a required field if you are using Reject Reason logging.

Making a field Required to Submit guarantees that the radiographer enters all required Exam/Patient Information at the time the patient record is submitted to the database.

Making a field Required to Deliver prevents images that are missing key fields from going to the Archive (mandatory destination) until those fields are filled in.

•

•

•

This prevents you from sending images that have incomplete patient demographic information to workstations and printers only, until the radiographer enters the required information and accepts the image. The system then forwards the image to the mandatory destination. 1. Select each field check box you want to include from the Field Name list. 2. Select Required for Submission and / or Required for Delivery. 3. Select Editable if you want the radiographer to be able to edit the field. 4. Select Save Changes. If you are using Reject Reasons, you may want to make Tech ID a required field.

Navigational Buttons Main Menu


Back



311/454

5/22/2018



Image Viewer Editor Configuration

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Image Processing Preferences Changing Image Processing Preferences The Image Processing Preference Editor provides controls so that you can change the look of images from the Primary Category (all images in an anatomical region) to a Secondary Category (all body parts of that type) or from an individual View. The Image Processing Preference Editor lets you determine the Look of the images based on your preference. To use the Editor:

1. Select the Select New View button and select a Primary Category. 2. Select a Secondary Category. 3. Select a View. Selecting the Close button after selecting a Primary or Secondary Category will make your changes apply to all of the Views in that category. 4. Select the Change Look button. Use this to select one of the pre-configured looks first to approximate the desired Look. 5. Adjust the individual slider controls to fine-tune the desired effect. 6. Select the View Before and After button to compare your changes. 7. Select the View After Only button to see your selection. 8. Select Deliver to send the image to destinations for evaluation. Never make any changes based on a single image. Always use at least 5 to 6 images (of different body uses for the same View) when changing image preferences.

Read this Before You Make a Change in the Preference Editor Before making a change in the Preference Editor, check the following: Is the equipment calibrated?

Verify that the calibration of your printers, monitors, and workstations are correct. See Monitor Configuration, Introduction in Key Operator's Help.

Is the image consistently too light or too dark?

Before making a change, verify the consistency of the view from other patient images.

Have you saved the changes?

Make all of the changes and save them before exiting the screen.

Changing the Look of a View 1. Select the Select New View button.


312/454

5/22/2018



2. Select Primary and Secondary Category, and View that already exists in the system (or close the window at the desired level). 3. Select Change Look to select a starting point for correction. 4. Select Accept this Look. 5. Change the image processing values to correct the image by moving the slider controls. 6. Select View Before and After to compare your changes. 7. Select View After only. 8. Select Deliver to select a printer or a workstation to send the image to for evaluation.. 9. Select Save Changes. There is no confirmation on the status of the delivered image.

Navigational Buttons Select New View

Select New View lets you select a Primary Category,

Secondary Category, or an individual view. When you select an entire Category, the changes you make affect every view in that category. For example: Select the Thorax Category. Select the Close button (red X). Change Chest AP Brightness from 3 to 5 (+2), thus changing Chest Lateral, currently at 6, to 8 (+2). Select Save Changes. Since Thorax is the highest level, this selection changes all images at all levels.

The Viewer is color-coded to indicate the level you have chosen. Change Look

Pre-configured examples of Brightness, Latitude, Detail Contrast, Sharpness, and Noise to choose from to start building the look you want.

Deliver

Select the workstation or printer to send the image to.

View Before & After

Displays the image before adjustment and after.

Zoom

Use the Zoom feature to evaluate images. To return to normal view, select Zoom to clear the check box. When the image is in Zoom mode, you can change the viewing area by "panning" or changing the view by selecting the image area by selecting a point on the image and dragging across the image area. Select the image and drag across.


313/454

5/22/2018



When the image is in zoom mode you can: change image processing characteristics save changes Region of Interest

Lets you determine the EI of any point on the image. The mean, max, min, and is standard deviation of the exposure for the selected location displayed in a rectangle around the selected point of interest. The size of the Region of Interest is configurable by the Key Operator in Display Configuration.

Save Changes

Completes the action by writing to the local database.

Main Menu

Exits the current screen and returns to the Main Menu.

Back/Cancel

The Cancel button returns you to the previous function without changing to another screen. The Cancel button toggles to the Back button after you have selected Save Changes.

See also:

Adjusting Image Parameters Adjusting Image Quality Controls Changing the Look Using View Before and After


314/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Image Processing Preferences What Is a Look? Looks are different recipes for processing the images that take into consideration the degree of brightness, latitude, detail contrast, sharpness and noise that radiologists like. Every institution chooses its Look from a family of Looks provided by Carestream Health, Inc. and can then customize exams to its own taste using the Image Processing Preference Editor .

The Family of Looks Look Name

Description

Premium Processing suppression

with

noise

Default Look from factory. Base models (no biases) used in clinical study. Noise suppression consistent with Low Exposure Optimization.

Fixed Processing with medium contrast, detail, and sharpness

Models which have fixed rendering parameters. Noise suppression same as above.

Premium Processing with brighter processing, more detail, and sharpness

Default Look biased to produce brighter, sharper, more detailed renderings with custom noise suppression.

Premium Processing with high contrast and detail

Default Look biased to be higher in contrast (less latitude) and detail with

Premium Processing with more latitude

Premium latitude

Processing

with

medium

custom noise suppression. Default Look biased to provide on average slightly greater latitude and detail than the CR Premium Look with custom noise suppression. Default Look biased to be less digital in appearance, in line with a medium latitude analog film Look.

Baseline Image Processing

Mimics Non-EVP Plus processing.

Premium 2 Image Processing with noise suppression

Now has a DR mimic Look for General Radiography.

See also:

Changing the Look


315/454

5/22/2018



What Is a DICOM GSDF-calibrated Monitor? Grayscale Standard Display Function (GSDF) is a standard designed for high-quality output

from computer monitors used to view X-ray images. The calibration procedure is listed in the DICOM standard part 14.


316/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Image Processing Preferences Region of Interest (ROI) Tool The ROI Tool calculates the statistics about the code values and optical density of a userspecified area of the CR image. The tool displays the mean, minimum, maximum and standard deviation values for the code values within the area specified by the user on the image. The code value measurements are from the raw, unprocessed image and the optical density measurements are from the processed image. The ROI Tool is accessible only to Key Operators. After selecting the location to be included in the ROI calculations on the CR display by using a finger touch or mouse-click, the measurement appears. The Key Operator can configure the size of the selected region of interest to be from 1 x 1 mm cm to 10 x 10 mm cm on the Display Configuration Screen. Select Region of Interest to identify the Exposure Index of any point on the image.

To access the Region of Interest Tool:

1. Select an image. 2. Open the Image Viewer Screen. 3. At the Key Operator Preference Editor, select the Region of Interest button. 4. Select a point on the image. The Region of Interest is the mean code value of exposure, indicated in a square area drawn around the point you selected on the screen. The display reads: Mean:1229, 0.49 O.D. Min:1045, 0.37 O.D. Max:1384, 0.61 O.D. St. Dev: 47.2, 0.04 O.D. The first value in each row is code data, and the second value is optical density (OD).


317/454

5/22/2018



The Key Operator can configure the size of the Region of Interest window in Display Configuration.

Mean Code Value Usefulness The mean code value provided in ROI information is useful for determining the selective exposure in different sections of an anatomic or test image. Medical physicists may use the ROI Tool for system calibration or QC testing.


318/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Image Processing Preferences Image Processing Controls

•

Brightness makes an image lighter or darker. Decreasing brightness can make low exposure

noise more visible.

•

Latitude controls the number of shades of gray visible in the image. Increasing the latitude

increases the number of gray levels, making blacks and whites less apparent. You may want to increase the latitude if important anatomical information is in the black or white region of the image and it cannot be visualized. Increasing latitude: Increases the number of gray levels.

o

Decreases the apparent D-max and D-min areas.

o

•

Detail Contrast controls the local contrast of medium sized structures such as joint spaces,

Sharpness controls the visibility of finer structures such as bony trabeculae, lung markings, and

•

vertebral body spacings, and ribs in the image. Increasing detail contrast makes anatomical features more pronounced. micro calcifications.

•

Noise controls the appearance of quantum noise in the image.

Moving the slider control up decreases the effect of noise suppression.

o

As a Best Practice, evaluate the changes in Zoom mode before saving. Detail Contrast, Sharpness, and Noise should be adjusted with careful inspection. See also:

Changing Image Processing Preferences What Is a Look? Changing the Look Using View Before and After


319/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Image Processing Preferences Using View Before and After The Image Preference Editor Screen lets you compare the look of one image against another and select the look you prefer. 1. At the Key Operator Functions menu, select System Configuration and then select Image Processing Preferences. 2. Select an image. 3. Change Image Processing Preferences. 4. Select View Before and After and compare the results. 5. Select the look you prefer. See also:

Changing Image Processing Preferences Image Processing Controls Using View Before and After Changing the Look


320/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Image Processing Preferences Changing the Look 1. Select Change Look. 2. View the images provided. Use the Up or Down arrows to see all of the sample Looks. Consider the characteristics described above. 3. Select Accept This Look if the sample image displays the image processing results you would like to see for images with that View.

Navigational Buttons Accept This Look

Previous Page

Page/Next

Cancel

Selects the View that is closest to the image processing values you would like to see for that View. The selected Look appears in the Image Processing Preference Editor. Additional changes can be made at this time. Selects the previous page of samples or the next page of sample Views. Cancels the selection. Continue Without Saving.

Zoom

Zooms the view to examine the image more closely.

See also:

What Is a Look? Changing Image Processing Preferences Image Processing Controls Using View Before and After


321/454

5/22/2018



Configuring Destination Profiles

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Profile Configuration What Is a Destination Profile? A Destination Profile is the set of destinations where images are sent. In the CR and DR system, Image Routing is controlled by profiles. A destination profile has three components:

Name: the name or description of the profile.

Criteria: Cassette Size, Category (body part, projection), Department, Physician, Name, or

•

•

Machine Name.

•

Destinations: where the data is sent when the criteria matches.

The criteria fields are prioritized by the order they are listed on the Profile Configuration Screen. You can change the order by using the second set of Up and Down arrows. Default must always be last.

Category

Department Filter

Physician Name

Cassette Size Filter

Machine Name Filter

Output (for Multi-format Prints)

•

•

•

•

•

•

When an exam is routed, the information contained in the Patient Record is compared to the criteria information in thethan allsystem definedassigns profiles,the similar to performing a query. If the imagecontained matches more one fields profile, ofthe first profile in the list that matches all criteria.

Profiles can be assigned from Procedure Mapping or manually on the Patient Input Screen and Select Destination Screen.

What Is the Default Profile? A default profile is defined automatically by the system. It appears in the list of profile destinations with an (*) asterisk next to the name. You can rename the default profile, but you cannot change the criteria or delete it. There must be only one default profile. If the data does not match the criteria for any of the existing profiles, the system uses the default profile destination. See also:

Destination Profile Configuration Define multiple profiles with criteria so you can assign the data’s destinations.


322/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Destination Profile Configuration Destination Profile Configuration How do I add a new destination profile? 1. Select Add. 2. Enter the name of the profile. 3. Select the color that will identify this profile. 4. Select the filter (or filters) that will identify this profile. All profiles, except default, require a filter. 5. Select the destinations (printers and workstations) to send images to automatically. 6. Select the Mandatory check box if the image must reach that destination in order for the exam to be considered complete. (Mandatory destinations are often archives.)

How do I edit an existing destination profile? 1. Select Turn Edit On. 2. Touch the profile name. Enter the name of the profile. 3. Touch the color field and select the color that will identify this profile. 4. Select the filter (or filters) that will identify this profile. Touch Clear to clear all filters for that profile. 5. Select the destinations (printers and workstations) to send images with this profile to automatically. 6. Select the Mandatory check box if the image must reach that destination in order for the exam to be considered complete. (Mandatory destinations are often archives.)

Why can't I delete the default destination profile? You can rename the default profile, but you cannot delete it or edit the filters for it. The default profile is set by the system and is used to send images to destinations when all other criteria fail. There must always be one default profile.

How do I create a destination profile for images from a cassette size (CR Only)? 1. Select Turn Edit On. 2. Select the Destination Profile Name field and enter a name for the profile. 3. Select Clear for the Category and Department fields. 4. Touch the Cassette field and select the desired cassette size (CR Only).


323/454

5/22/2018



5. Select the destinations. 6. Select Save Changes. Images that meet this criterion (this cassette size) will go to these selected destinations automatically.

Navigational Buttons Turn On

Edit

Edits the profile. Select this button to make changes to filters such as name, category, department, physician, cassette size.

Save Changes


Main Menu


Back


See also:

What is a Destination Profile? Configuring Destination Profiles with the Capture Link System


324/454

5/22/2018



View Configuration

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > View Configuration View Configuration What is a View? A View is a pre-set image type that a radiographer can select to represent an exam. It is the basic element in the digital image chain. Views are associated with procedures on the Patient Input Screen and in optional Procedure Mapping. When you create a View, it appears on the Patient Input Screen as soon as you add it and save it on the View Configuration Screen.

How do I create a View for a radiographer to select for an exam? You can create a View by changing one or more of the following configurations: Color

Mask

Body Part

Grid Suppression

Projection

Noise Suppression

Position

Raw

Text Box

True Size

View Name

Tick Marks

Tutor Image

Rotation

Skin Detection

Line

Crop Type

For every View, there is an associated look and customized changes for each of the preference editor controls. These can be seen, but not modified in the View Configuration Screen.

•

Brightness

Latitude Sharpness

•

•

Contrast

Noise

•

•

To create a new View:

1. Reduce the number of Views in the list by selecting the Category radio buttons.


325/454

5/22/2018



2. Select the check box of the View with a similar body part/projection you want to copy. 3. Select Copy Checked Views to copy the View settings and create a new View. 4. Select a Primary and Secondary Category to associate with the copy. 5. Select the new View name tabbed keyboard. 6. Select the radio button to display the parameters for the View (column selection). 7. Select the item that you want to change and enter a new value from the tabbed keyboard. Repeat for each parameter you want to change. 8. Select Show View Details to edit all configurations of the View at once, or use the Column Selection radio buttons to control which columns are displayed in the View list. 9. Select the Global Edit check box to apply the changes you make to every row of the Category selected. 10. Select Save Changes.

How do I delete a View? 1. Select the check box next to the View(s) you want to delete. 2. Select Delete Checked Views to delete the selected View(s). A confirmation dialog shows what Views will be deleted. Before selecting Delete Checked Views, deselect all Views to make sure that no additional Views are unexpectedly selected. Views are erased from the system when you delete them from the View Configuration. Deleting Views from View Category Management moves Views to the Uncategorized category so they can be added back into a category later, if desired.

How do I change the sort order of the View List?

•

Select the heading item in the list. The list order changes from ascending to descending.

How to assign default attributes to Unassigned Images When an image is unassigned, it has no View attributes assigned to it. When you assign the image, it still does not take on the attributes of the selected View. For example, the Text Box would not appear, even though the assigned View has a text box as an attribute. In the View Configuration Screen, you can assign attributes so that all unassigned images are configured. To do this, select the Unassigned Default radio button and enable the following for an unassigned default:

Color

View Name

Tutor Image

•

•

•


326/454

5/22/2018



Look Name

Grid Suppression

Noise Suppression

Raw

•

•

•

•

•

Skin Line Detection Internal Text Box

Cropping Type

Surround Mask

•

•

•

How to view the Look name To view the name of the Look that has been selected for the View: 1. Select the Brightness, Latitude, and Detail Contrast radio buttons. 2. View the name of the Look for each View. The Look name is the far right column on the screen.

How to change the default characteristics of an image 1. On the View Configuration Screen, place a check mark in the Select column next to the View you want to modify. 2. Select the characteristic you want to modify, such as Rotation. 3. Select the preferred rotation from the pop-up menu. 4. Select Save Changes.

Navigational Buttons Show View Details

Lets you view the settings such as, Noise Suppression, Detail Contrast, Latitude, Brightness, and Sharpness. You can change settings such as, Grid Suppression, Raw, Surround Mask, the indicator color, True-size, Tick Marks, Skin line detection, and cropping type. Select the tutor image to change the tutor image for the View. Select internal Text Box to add a text box configuration to the View. Select the tutor image to place the Text Box. Select the External Text box setting to be at the bottom, left, or off.

Delete Checked Views

Selects the check box of the Views you want to delete and then select Delete Checked Views. A confirmation message appears. If the Views are


327/454

5/22/2018



associated with a procedure, make sure that deleting them will not affect Procedure Mapping. Copy Checked Views

View Category Management

Selects the check box of the View you want to copy and then select Copy Checked Views. Rename the View and modify it if desired. Select a Primary Category and a Secondary Category where you want to place the View. Add or delete Primary, Secondary Categories, or Views. Use the far right column arrows to move highlighted items to arrange how the Regions, Exams, and Views display. The order of the items in the column will display left to right, top to bottom at the Patient Input Screen.

Check All

Selects all check boxes. One row is always selected.

Uncheck All

Removes the check mark from all check boxes.

Save Changes


Main Menu


Back


Tab Controls Keyboard

Activates when you select a button. The button becomes active for editing. Type the information from the keyboard.

Color

Allows you to choose the colors of the buttons from over 200 individual colors.

Color Palette

Provides a full color palette of blended hues.

Body Part*

Provides three tabs containing all body parts in use to create a View.

Projection*

Provides from three tabs containing all projections in use to create a View.

Position*

Provides all positions in use to create a View.

Flip/Rotate

Flips or rotates, and lets you select the degree.

Tutor Image

Selects the graphic tutor image that represents the View. Both Gold and silhouette images are available.

* You can use the virtual alphanumeric keyboard to change body part, projection, or position. After saving, the new item appears in the appropriate keyboard. See also:

What Is a SNOMED® Code? Managing View Categories 312 http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/koda k-c r-topic s-sof t-ve r-52

328/454

5/22/2018



Changing View Configuration Details


329/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > View Configuration Configuring Surround Mask Enlargement Surround Mask Enlargement allows the auto mask to pull back off the collimated area in order

to show the actual collimation. The increments are in centimeters. It is recommended to use 2-3 cm. Using more than this can create a black border to appear inside the image area. To apply the Surround Mask Enlargement:

1. From the Main Menu, select Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > View Configuration. 2. Select the fourth radio button (under Mask). 3. For a specific View, enter the value for the mask enlargement, from 0 to 12 mm. 4. To change all Views, select Global Edit to apply the mask enlargement to all Views. This configuration changes the appearance of the mask on all images you have selected.

Surround Mask Enlargement Appearance Surround Mask Enlargement allows the auto mask to pull back off the collimated area in order to show the actual collimation.

See also:


330/454

5/22/2018



Using the Surround Mask Tab Applying Automatic Masking Applying Manual Masking


331/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > View Configuration Changing View Configuration Attributes You can view and/or change the following attributes which make up each View: See the View Configuration Details Screen for a list of items that make up each View. When the Global Edit Mode box is checked, any changes apply to all of the Views for the category selected. Changing the View name will not change the image processing. The image processing for the View is determined by the way the View is set up in the Image Processing Preference Editor. To change the Attributes of a View:

1. Select a View. 2. Select the desired attributes (View Name, Rotation, Tutor Image, etc.) 3. Select Save Changes. A summary of the View's attributes are located by selecting Show View Details where you can.

Edit the attributes of a single View.

View the standard naming and encoding convention (SNM3 Codes) for identifying body part, position, and orientation in the DICOM header.

•

•



Back


See also:

View Configuration Managing View Categories What Is a SNOMED® Code


332/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > View Configuration > View Category Management Managing View Categories You can Add or Delete Primary Categories, Secondary Categories, or Views.

Use the far right column arrows to move highlighted items and arrange the way the Regions, Exams, and Views display.

The items in the column will display left to right, top to bottom, at the Patient Input Screen.

•

•

1. Select a Primary Category. The category name highlights so that you can edit it. The associated Secondary Category and views appear in the second and third columns. 2. Edit the category or select Add to save it and start a new category. 3. Select a color for the Primary Category from the keyboard. 4. Select a Secondary Category and color. 5. Add or delete the views as appropriate. 6. Select Save Changes. See also:

What Is a SNOMED® Code Changing View Configuration Details View Configuration


333/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > View Configuration > Show View Details What Is a SNOMED ® Code A SNOMED® (SNM3) code is a coded sequence of numbers that identifies attributes of a view. SNOMED values are pre-configured by Carestream Health. They are a standard naming and

encoding convention for identifying body part, position, and orientation in the DICOM header. Each view contains SNOMED codes for body part, position, and projection. The information typically includes:

Body Part

Projection

Laterality

Study Instance UID

Series Instance UID (all images in the same series or different series)

Image Instance Number or Image Acquisition Number

•

•

•

•

•

•

See also:

Changing View Configuration Details


334/454

5/22/2018



Trauma Default Configuration

Trauma Defaults Configuration Trauma is configured by the Key Operator to provide a fast source of patient information to use when: Patient information is not available. •

•

You need to complete an exam rapidly when a patient's identity may not be known.

To set up and configure trauma defaults:

1. Select New Tab. 2. Select the tab size based on the number of items you want in the list. 3. Select a button and enter the name in edit mode. 4. Select the Color Tab and select a color. 5. Select Save Changes. 6. Select Change Trauma Defaults. The Trauma Defaults [Patient Name] displays. See Entering or Changing Trauma Exam Data 7. Enter the desired information, such as Priority, Gender , Tech ID, etc. 8. Select Save Changes. 9. Select Back to pre-configure more Trauma buttons. or Select Main Menu > Study Data > Trauma to review the newly created Trauma buttons. You cannot move a button from one tab to another. You can enter five tabs of 40 entries, or 200 items per list.

Navigation Buttons Change Defaults

Trauma

Opens the Patient Data form on the Patient Input Screen. Lets you edit the default patient data for the selected trauma button. Enter the required data that represents this default ID.

New Tab

Selects the matrix size based on the number of items you will have in your list. Choose from 4 x 5, 5 x 5, 6 x 5, 7 x 5, 8 x 5. You can enter up to five tabs of data per list.

Delete Tab

Deletes the tab of information from the list. You will be prompted to confirm the deletion. There is no recovery from deleting a tab.

Show Button

Displays the button in the list in the interface. Toggles to Hide Button.

Hide Button

Hides the button display on the interface. Toggles to Show Button.


335/454

5/22/2018



Save Changes

Saves the change to the local database.

Main Menu

Exits the current screen and returns to the system Main Menu.

Back


Changing Button Colors or Moving Buttons on a Tab Use the Tab Controls that appear at the bottom of the screen: Tab Controls Keyboard

Activates the keyboard when you touch a button. The button becomes active for editing. Type the information from the virtual keyboard.

Color

Selects the colors of the buttons from over 200 individual colors. Select the color you desire.

Color Palette

Selects from a full color palette of blended hues.

Move

Moves the button to another position on the tab. "Move" does not let you move the button to another tab.

See also:

Changing Trauma Defaults Hiding Trauma Defaults Procedure Mapping Configuration


336/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Trauma Defaults Entering or Changing Trauma Exam Data The Change Trauma Defaults button associates a default patient record with the Trauma Default button previously named. To create or edit the patient record information for the Trauma button:

1. Select the Change Trauma Defaults button. 2. Enter default values for the fields of interest for the selected Trauma exam. 3. Use the Unique Number button to assign a serial number of 1 to 4 digits to selected fields. For example: 1. In the Patient Last Name field, enter Doe. 2. Select Unique Number 2 digits. The result is a series of Trauma Patient names: Doe 01, Doe 02, Doe 03, etc. In the Patient ID field Select Unique Number 4. The system identifies the patient as 0001, 0002, 0003, etc. 4. Use the Procedure Name field or Procedure Code field to assign a procedure to the trauma default button if the Procedure Mapping option has been enabled. 5. Select Save Changes. To prevent Trauma exams from being delivered to Mandatory Destinations, make sure you leave one of the Required for Delivery fields blank Tab Controls Keyboard

The keyboard becomes active when you select a field. The field becomes active for editing. Type the information from the keyboard.

Unique Number

Lets you assign a unique number to the Patient Name fields, the Patient ID field, or the Accession Number field. This ensures that no matter how often this Trauma ID is used, the Patient ID will be unique.

See also:

Trauma Defaults Configuration Hiding Trauma Defaults


337/454

5/22/2018



Hiding Trauma Exam Buttons You can configure trauma exam buttons to not show on the Trauma Defaults list. To hide a trauma exam Button:

1. From the Trauma Defaults Screen, select a trauma exam button, such as cranium. 2. Select Hide Button. 3. Select Save Changes. To restore a Trauma exam button:

1. From the Trauma Defaults Screen, select a trauma exam button, such as cranium. 2. Select Show Button. 3. Select Save Changes. See also:

Trauma Defaults Configuration Changing Trauma Defaults


338/454

5/22/2018



Statistics

Key Operator Functions > Statistics > Technologist Statistics Viewing Radiographer's Statistics View all radiographer's statistics, based on Tech ID, that are compiled from the KODAK DIRECTVIEW Reject Analysis Software. Techs

View all of the statistics for a particular radiographer.

Views

View all of the statistics for all of the views for the selected radiographer.

Image List

View all of the statistics for all of the images done by the selected radiographer with the selected view. View each of the images for the selected radiographer.

How do I change the order of the list? Select the header bar of the Tech, Views, or Image List window. You can sort in any column. A triangle appears over the column that is being sorted and indicates ascending or descending order.

Where does the image list come from? The Image List data contains information for the past year. Only those images that still exist on the System can be viewed. To view the images, select the magnifying glass. The images are delivered images.

How do I save the data? Save all statistics by downloading them to a removable USB drive, hard drive, or floppy diskette. See also:

Downloading Statistics

Navigational Buttons Main Menu


Back

Returns you to the previous screen.


339/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > Statistics > Destination Summary Statistics Viewing Destination Summary Statistics

•

Destination Summary Statistics updates the status of the destinations listed and the status of

the devices as you go to the screen.

Lets you check the status of destinations if you are getting a repeated failed delivery.

Identifies problem destinations quickly.

•

•



Back



340/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > Flagged Image List Viewing the Flagged Image List The Flagged Image List lets you:

Locate flagged images quickly.

Examine images closely.

Harvest images for with or without private health information (PHI).

Unflag images.

•

•

•

•

This action permanently deletes the image.

Navigation Buttons Clear Fields

Removes all data entered in the search fields.

Main Menu

Exits the current screen and returns to the system main menu.

Back


Quick Menu

Shutdown lets you safely shut down the machine. Logout logs you off the system.


341/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > Statistics > Download Statistics Downloading Statistics Download Statistics lets you:

Log in to multiple CR Systems, remove and retrieve all statistics.

Select a date range and download all statistics to a spreadsheet for data management.

•

•

Add or delete device IP addresses in the system from which to download statistics.

•

To download statistics:

1. Select the Add Device IP Address button. 2. Enter the IP addresses of the devices you want to get statistics for and select the devices. 3. Enter the from/to date range. 4. Select Retrieve Statistics. 5. Select Save file as. This is the location where the statistics should be saved.

Navigation Buttons Delete Device Address

IP

Select/Unselect All

Deletes the row that is currently selected. A tool to quickly get statistics from multiple devices.

Save Changes

Updates the IP address list so that it is not necessary to type it again. It does not retrieve statistics.

Main Menu


Back


Ping Machines

If the connection is good, the light appears green. If there is a problem with the connection, the light appears red.

See also:

Exporting Data


342/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > Statis Cassette Statistics Cassette Statistics Cassette Statistics lets you view the performance of a cassette and identify possible problems

with cassettes. The Cassette ID column identifies the cassette. The screen also shows the number of scans for each cassette, how many images were accepted or rejected, and the percent rejected for each cassette ID. The total of each column appears at the bottom of the screen. You can use this information to remove a cassette from service if necessary.


343/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > Statistics > Erase Statistics Erase Cycles The Erase Cycles Screen tracks the number of scans/erases done with each pair of lamps. The Actuation Count displays the total scans on the system. The Batch Erase Count displays the number of cassettes that have been erased by going into the Batch Erase Mode (825/850/975 CR System) or Manual Erase Mode (Classic/Elite CR System). This number is separate from the actuation count. You can use this screen to identify a problem with the erase lamp assembly if the erase lamps are burning out sooner than expected.


344/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > Statistics > Download Statistics Exporting Data With the optional Administrative Analysis and Reporting Software, you can retrieve data from multiple CR or DR Systems, download it to a PC, and analyze it using pre-configured templates for MICROSOFT EXCEL 2000 or higher. The interactive reports can be configured, rearranged, analyzed, saved, and appended as you choose. To set-up to export data from several machines:

This feature is best operated from an office computer that is connected to the CR network using the Remote Key Operator function. The following items must be installed on a computer with access to the network on which the CR machines are connected:

Remote Access Software

Templates CD

MICROSOFT EXCEL 2000 or higher (not provided)

•

•

•

The CR devices from which data must be obtained must have Administrative Analysis and Reporting Software activated on the System. 1. At the Remote Key Operator , open MICROSOFT INTERNET EXPLORER. 2. In the address window, enter the IP address of one machine you choose to be the host machine. The host will get the data from all other machines (for example: http://192.168.1.1). 3. To the end of the IP address, add :56333/ For example, a complete entry would look like this: http://192.168.1.1:56333/ 4. Log in as a Key Operator at the Remote Key Operator computer. 5. Select Key Operator Functions >Statistics >Download Statistics. 6. At the Download Statistics Screen, select Add Device IP Address. 7. Add the IP address of all of the Consoles from which you want to collect data. 8. Select Save Changes. 9. Select the check box for the devices you want to get information from. 10. Enter the From Date and To Date to determine the date range. 11. Select Retrieve Statistics. 12. Choose one of the following:

Stats

TQT Stats

•

•

13. Select View statistics or Save File As. 14. Select a drive or the WINDOWS desktop. 15. Select New Folder . 16. Name the folder. 329 http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/koda k-c r-topic s-sof t-ve r-52

345/454

5/22/2018



17. Select Save. 18. Highlight the file in the list. 19. Select the Select button. This returns you to the Download Statistics Screen. 20. Open the CR Admin Reporting Template from the Administrative Analysis and Reporting Software CD. 21. Save to the desktop of the Remote Key Operator .

22. Open the template. 23. At the prompt, select Enable Macros. 24. Select Import Data from the worksheet. 25. Select the EXCEL spreadsheet saved to a drive or on the desktop. 26. Select Yes to overwrite the existing record.


346/454

5/22/2018



Text Box Configuration

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Configurable Text Boxes Configurable Text Box Menu Configuring Text Boxes Configurable Text Box Options Editing a Text Box Multi-format Image Internal Text Box Selecting an Internal or an External Text Box Selecting a Default Multi-Format Text Box Using a Multi-Format Image Internal Text Box Using a Multi-Format Image External Text Box Using a Multi-Format Page External Text Box Using a Single Image Internal Text Box Using the Single Image External Text Box


347/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Configurable Text Boxes Configuring Text Boxes Selecting a Text Box Editing a Text Box Selecting a Default Multi-Format Text Box Configurable Text Box


348/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Configurable Text Boxes Multi-format Image Internal Text Box

The text box can be up to 160 mm wide. Its content depends on the length of the data field and the size of the font.

The Multi-format Image Internal Text Box appears inside each image area on a multi-format print.

Print on any printer that supports multi-format printing.

Select this text box when you want to label each individual image and/or want to print True-size.

Text boxes appear on the print only. They do not appear when the image is viewed on a workstation.

•

•

•

•

•

See also:

Editing a Text Box Selecting a Default Multi-format Text Box Using a Single Image Internal Text Box Using a Multi-format Page External Text Box Configurable Text Box Menu Selecting a Default Multi-format Text Box


349/454

5/22/2018



Selecting an Internal or an External Text Box To select the appropriate Text Box, consider the type of image area that is displayed. You can make the selection or the Key Operator can select a default Text Box for any given View.

Select the Internal Text Box when you want the information to appear within the image and when you must be able to print to any printer. The Text Box can be moved to any corner or any inside edge to avoid covering any anatomy.

Select the External Text Box when you want to position the label outside the image area. This Text Box shrinks the image and affects True-size printing.

•

•

The Key Operator configures a Text Box to automatically fill in with data, such as Hospital Name, Exposure Index, or View.


350/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Configurable Text Boxes Using a Single Image Internal Text Box

The Internal Text Box displays information about the patient, exam, and image and is positioned inside the image area on one of the four sides of the image.

The text box can be up to 160 mm wide. Its content depends on the length of the data fields and the size of the font.

You can move the text box to any corner or any inside edge to avoid covering anatomy.

You can print an Internal Text Box on any printer. Use an Internal Text Box when you want to print True-size.


•

•

•

•

•

See also:

Editing a Text Box Using a Multi-format Image External Text Box Using a Multi-format Image Internal Text Box Selecting a Default Multi-format Text Box Using a Multi-format Page External Text Box Configurable Text Box Menu


351/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Configurable Text Boxes Using a Multi-format Image Internal Text Box

The text box can be up to 160 mm wide. Its content depends on length of data fields and the size of the font selected.

The Multi-format Image Internal Text Box appears inside each image area on a multi-format print.

Print it on any printer that supports multi-format printing.

Select this text box when you want to label each individual image and/or want to print True-size.


•

•

•

•

•

See also:

Selecting a Default Multi-format Text Box Editing a Text Box Configurable Text Box Menu Using a Multi-format Image External Text Box Using a Single Image Internal Text Box Using the Single Image External Text Box Using a Multi-format Page External Text Box 336 http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/koda k-c r-topic s-sof t-ve r-52

352/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Configurable Text Boxes Using a Multi-format Image External Text Box

The text box can hold up to 120 characters and is limited to one line.

Use this text box when you want the information to fall outside a multi-format image.


•

•

•

See also:

Selecting a Default Multi-format Text Box Editing a Text Box Configurable Text Box Menu Using a Multi-format Image Internal Text Box


353/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Configurable Text Boxes Using a Multi-format Page External Text Box Because certain image-specific data may not be identical for every image on a multi-format print, these fields should be omitted from the Multi-format Page External Text Box. When creating a Multi-format Page External Text box, include only DICOM fields with values that will always be identical for all of the included images . Failure to do so will result in fields that display a question mark (?).

•

Select the Multi-format Page External Text Box when you want the text label to: Appear outside the image area on a Multi-format print.

o

Extend across the page under the images.

o

The text box can be up to 120 characters wide and is limited to two lines.


•

•

See also:

Selecting a Default Multi-format Text Box Editing a Text Box Using a Single Image Internal Text Box Multi-format Image Internal Text Box Using a Multi-format Image External Text Box Editing a Text Box Configurable Text Box Menu


354/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Configurable Text Boxes Using a Single Image External Text Box

The External Text Box positions the information outside the image area; therefore, it never interferes with anatomy. However, the box takes up space on the film, and the system crops additional image data compared with printing without an External Text Box. Thus, an External Text Box affects True-size printing.

This text box can be up to 120 characters wide.

Text boxes appear on the print only. They do not appear when the image is viewed on a

•

•

•

workstation. See also:

Editing a Text Box Selecting a Default Multi-format Text Box Using a Single Image Internal Text Box Using the Single Image Internal Text Box Using a Multi-format Page External Text Box Using a Multi-format Image External Text Box Using a Multi-format Image Internal Text Box Configurable Text Box Menu


355/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Configurable Text Boxes Selecting a Default Multi-format Text Box 1. At the Key Operator Functions menu, select System Configuration and select Configurable Text Boxes. 2. Select Configurable Text Box Options. 3. Select each check box corresponding with the text boxes) you want as a possible default for multi-format printing. The radiographer can select other text box formats on the Multi-Format Configuration Screen.

See also:

Editing a Text Box


356/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Configurable Text Boxes Editing a Text Box At the top of each Text Box Editor screen is a template for the text box you have selected.

Data fields are represented by question marks: ???????????????

The maximum width and height of the text box are listed in the background next to the sample box.

•

•

How do I activate the next or prior available field? Select a field. The question marks (??????????) should be highlighted. Or, select the Move Next and Move Prior buttons.

How do I edit the fields in the text box? 1. Select a field you would like to change. The question marks (???????????) should be highlighted. 2. Select the DICOM Field box. 3. Assign a label that comes before the DICOM value. 4. Select Assign Field. The new DICOM name and tag are added for you. Optional field optional does not have value, then then the the text fieldbox is removed from the text box. :IfIfalla of theisfields on aand lineitare optional anda blank, will get shorter.

This is useful if you want to include a field such as Image Comments in the text box when it has a value, but you do not want to make the text box unnecessarily large (for example, for the time when there are no comments).

How do I add a field? 1. Select a field to use as a reference point. The question marks (???????????) should be highlighted. 2. Select New Field Before or New Field After . A field of one character appears before or after your selection. 3. Select the Field Length box. 4. Enter the desired length of the field from the keyboard. 5. Select the DICOM Field box. 6. Select a DICOM Field Name. 7. Select Assign Field.


357/454

5/22/2018



8. Select the Text Field Label box. 9. Assign a label that comes before the DICOM value.

How do I add a row if the buttons are gray? If you have the maximum number of rows, the Add Row buttons will not be active. Delete an unnecessary field to add a row, or select a different text box.

Can I reset the text box after I have changed it? Select Restore Small Default or Restore Large Default to return the text box to it's minimum or maximum configuration. For Multi-format Image Internal and Page External Text Box editors, select Restore Factory Default.

How are dates and times recorded in the system? The DICOM specification is as follows: Study Date—DICOM tag (0008,0020): The date the study started. Study Time—DICOM tag (0008,0030): The time the study started. Image Date—DICOM tag (0008,0023) Content Date: The date the image pixel data creation

started. Required if the image is part of a series in which the images are temporally related. Image Time—DICOM tag (0008,0033): The time the image pixel data creation started.

Required if the image is part of a series in which the images are temporally related. The system sets these values to be the date and time the image record was created in the database.

What are the Text Box Editing Controls? Optional

Designates the selected field as optional.

New Field Before

Creates a new field before the current selected field, designated by question marks: ????????????????

New Field After

Creates a new field after the current selected field.

Delete Field

Deletes the current selected field.

Move Next

Moves the current selected field to the next position.

New Row Above

Adds a new row above the selected field. This field is not active in Single Image Internal or Multi-format Image External Text Box configuration.

New Row Below

Adds a new row below the selected field. This field is not active in Single Image Internal or Multi-format Image External Text Box configuration.


358/454

5/22/2018



Moves the current selected field to the previous position.

Move Prior Restore Default

Small

Returns the text box to the small default configuration.

Restore Default

Large

Returns the text box to the large default configuration.

DICOM Field

Select the DICOM Field. From the Keyboard, select Show most common DICOM fields only to reduce the size of the list. Select the field. Select the field you want to change and select Assign Field.

DICOM Tag

Displays the DICOM Tag associated with the DICOM Field.

Assign Field

After selecting a field in the text box, select a field from the DICOM field list and select Assign Field. The new field appears in the text box.

Text Field Label

Enter a label for the field with the keyboard.

Field Length

Enter the maximum length of the selected field. Keep the font size in mind.

Font Size

Enter the font size for the selected field with the keypad and select Enter .

Justification

Place the text Left, Right, or Center within the selected field.

Restore Default

Return Multi-format Image Internal and Page External text boxes to their original format.

Factory


359/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Configurable Text Box Menu > Configurable Text Box Options Configurable Text Box Options Select the check box of each option you want to be available in your system. You may choose as many formats as you wish.

•

Use Transparent background for Internal Text Boxes. The text appears directly on the background of the image.

Use the Image Internal Text Box in Multi-format Images.

Use the Image External Text Box in Multi-format Images.

Use the Page External Text Box in Multi-Format Images.

Use Transparent background for Text Markers.

•

•

•

•

See also:

Using a Multi-Format Image Internal Text Box Using a Multi-Format Image External Text Box Using a Multi-Format Page External Text Box


360/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > Manage Patient Exam Records Managing Patient Exam Records To delete a patient record:

1. Enter the search criteria such as Accession Number, Patient ID, Patient Last Name, Patient First Name. 2. Select Find Study. 3. Select the Delete box next to the record to be deleted. 4. Select the Delete Patients button at the bottom of the screen to remove the patient records from the system. To delete all patient records:

•

Select Delete All Patients from the Manage Patient Exam Records query page to delete all patients from the system.

There is no recovery from this command. It deletes even records that have been Protected. To prevent selected patient records from being erased when the hard drive fills up:

1. Enter the search criteria such as Accession Number , Patient ID, Patient Last Name, Patient First Name. 2. Select Find Study. 3. For the selected study, check the box labeled Protected. 4. After marking all the patients to be protected, select the Protect Patients button at the bottom of the screen. 5. These studies are protected from removal when the hard drive fills up. These studies are not protected from the Delete All Studies action. Names and exams that have an Available, Pending Delivery, or Failed Delivery status cannot be deleted until they are corrected. Protected prevents the study from being deleted by the Disk Manager when the hard disk fills up. These studies are not protected from the Delete All Studies action.

Navigational Controls Clear Fields

All

Removes all the information entered in the search criteria fields.

Delete Patients

All

Deletes all patient information on the system.

Find Study

Locates the study that matches the criteria entered.

Main Menu

Exits the current screen and returns to the system Main Menu.

Back



361/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > Option Activation Register and Activate Options The Key Operator can add or remove purchased options from the Key Operator Functions > Option Registration Screen.

Activating an Option You will need a set of Activation Codes from Carestream Health, Inc. 1. Go to Key Operator Functions > Option Registration Screen. This screen displays all of the available options for that system. 2. Enter all Activation Codes one at a time into the text box from the keyboard or by using a barcode reader. If the code is entered manually, then the Add Code button adds the code to the list of Codes to the right. If you use the bar-code reader, the code is automatically added to the list. When an option code is entered and activated from this list, the features and benefits of that option become temporarily available on the system. The options stay active for several days. 4. Insert any USB drive into the System. 5. Select the Export Request button. 6. Select the USB drive as the destination directory for the Activation file. The file named OptionActivationRequest.xml is saved to the USB drive. 7. From a personal computer, e-mail the OptionActivationRequest.xml file to [email protected]. An Activation File is automatically e-mailed back to the sender. This file is a key that matches the hardware and software that identifies your system. The file cannot be used with any other device. 8. Place the Activation File on the USB drive. 9. Insert the USB drive into the System. 10. From the Key Operator > Option Registration Screen, select the Import Activation file. 11. Select the source directory for the Activation File (USB drive). The Activation File is copied to the local hard drive.

The system verifies the signature and activates the options as specified in the Activation File.

Sending the Incorrect Code If you type an Activation Code incorrectly, the system will recognize the error. The text box will not clear and an error message will be displayed. This prevents you from sending incorrectly entered Activation Codes.

No E-mail Available


362/454

5/22/2018



If there is no access to e-mail or the network is down, the options stay active for several days to give you time to send the Option Activation Request and retrieve the Activation File from a remote computer.

Navigational Buttons Activate Option

Makes the selected option immediately available in the system.

Main Menu


Back



363/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Scanner Options Scanner Options Scanner Options lets you select and enable or disable the Reduced Border Option.

•

To enable Reduced Border , select the check box on the screen and select Save Changes.

What is Reduced Border?

Images on 35 x 35 cm and 35 x 43 cm cassettes are captured with pixel sizes of 171 microns rather than 168 microns. The scanned image area increases slightly, producing borders smaller than those produced on other systems.


364/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > CSA Log Viewer CSA Log Viewer The CISCO Security Agent (CSA) feature is a tool that permits the Key Operator to review the event log file created on the modality. The CSA Log Viewer is displayed only in English.

The Cisco Security Agent provides protection against malware attacks. CSA intercepts and prevents system activities not specifically authorized by the System Software.

CSA prevents new intrusions by understanding the rules of inappropriate or unacceptable behavior for all applications.

When an application attempts an operation, the CSA checks the operation against the application's security policy and determines if the application should continue and if the request should be logged.

Because protection is based on blocking malicious behavior, the default policies stop both known and unknown attacks without needing updates.

•

•

•

•


365/454

5/22/2018



366/454

5/22/2018


Remote Devices

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Remote Device Configuration Configuring Remote Devices For the Key Operator to configure a Remote Operations Panel (ROP): At each CR System:

1. Select New Device.

Key Operator : Enter the IP address of the ROP.

Key Operator : Select Remote Operations Panel as the device type.

Key Operator : Repeat these steps for all Remote Operations Panels.

•

•

•

2. Select Edit ROP Links. 3. Enter the IP address of every CR System that will be linked to the ROP. 4. Select Save to All. This adds all CR links to each ROP that you added in steps 2-4. 5. Select Delete Device to remove a device from the CR System. At each ROP:

The initial link from the ROP to the CR System must have already been done by a qualified installer. 1. Select the link to the CR System on which you just made changes. 2. Once the ROP is linked, select Key Operator Functions. 3. Select Fetch ROP Links. This adds the new links you added in step 3 above. 4. Select the Quick Menu and select ROP Links to display the new links. This button does not exist at the CR System or the ROP.

Navigational Buttons Edit ROP Links

Changes the configuration of the existing communication links between ROPs and other devices. Takes you to the ROP Links Configuration Screen.

Ping Devices

Lets you ping selected devices to verify their connection. If the ping is successful, a green indicator appears in the left corner of the table. If there is no connection, the indicator turns red.

New Device

Lets you add a new IP address.

Delete

Lets you delete a device.


367/454

5/22/2018



Device Main Menu


Back



368/454

5/22/2018


Remote Devices

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Remote Device Configuration Setting Up Remote Access to the CR or DR System 1. At a Modality, from the Main Menu, select Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Remote Device Configuration. 2. Enter the IP address of the remote computer. 3. Select Remote Access Software for the Device Type. 4. Select Save Changes. 5. Follow the instructions to install Remote Access Software on an appropriate remote computer. 6. Select INTERNET EXPLORER at the remote computer and enter the IP address of the Modality. 7. Add:56333/ to the end of the IP address. Example: http://192.168.1.1:56333/ 8. At the firewall dialog, select Unblock. At the Logon Screen:

Log in as a Key Operator to access Remote Key Operator Functions.

Log on as a Security Administrator to access Remote Security Administrator Functions.

Log on as a Technologist to access the Remote Patient Data Entry Screen. (The Tech Log on button can be used if available.)

•

•

•

You must always enter :56333/ at the end of the IP address when setting up a remote function. To locate your System’s IP address, from the Main Menu, select Utilities, and select the System Status Screen. See also:

Remote Workstation Options Easy to Use Remote Access Software


369/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Remote Device Configuration Remote Workstation Options Remote Access Software is a customer-installed software that lets you set up and perform

selected CR functions from a remote computer. These functions include:

Remote Key Operator

Remote Patient Data Entry System (RPDES)

Remote Security Administrator

•

•

•

To verify the system requirements for Remote Access Software:

The system requirements are:

•

•

MICROSOFT WINDOWS XP Professional Operating System

INTERNET EXPLORER V 6.0 or higher 1.4 GHz Pentium M or higher processor

512 MB Ram (1 GB Recommended)

32 bit Color Monitor

1280 x 1024 monitor display

•

•

•

•

To determine the differences between the remote computer and the CR System:

When you log in remotely, the Main Menu will look different. The Study Data menu and the Image Review menu will not be available. The items you can access, depending on password, are described below: Remote Key Operator

Manage Patient Exam Records (delete records without images) Statistics (cannot view rejected images) System Configuration (reduced features) Backup & Restore (same as CR System) Option Registration (same as CR System)

Remote Patient Data Entry System

Access to the Patient Input Screen to pre-populate the Work List.

Remote Administrator

Access to all Security Administrator Functions.

Security

See also:

Exporting Data Configuring Remote Devices Setting Up Remote Access


370/454

5/22/2018


Remote Devices

Remote Workstation Options


371/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Remote Device Configuration Easy to Use Remote Access Software Once you have set up Remote Access Software, you can create a shortcut to Remote Access Software and place it on your desktop for easy access. To create the shortcut:

1. Open MICROSOFT INTERNET EXPLORER. 2. With the address displayed, click and drag the MICROSOFT INTERNET EXPLORER icon to your desktop. 3. Right-click the shortcut to rename it. 4. Double-click the shortcut to launch the remote connection. See also:

Configuring Remote Devices Setting Up Remote Access Remote Workstation Options


372/454

5/22/2018


Remote Devices

ROP Links Configuration ROP Links Configuration lets you enter the IP address of a Remote Operations Panel and set it up for communication with CR Systems. ROP Links is accessed from the Remote Device Configuration Screen. To enter a remote device: 1. Select the New Device button. The virtual keypad appears.

2. Enter the IP address of the remote device. 3. Select Edit ROP Links. The ROP Links Configuration Screen appears. 4. Select Add ROP Link to add the IP address of a CR System. An IP address must have the format of X.X.X.X where X is a number between 0 and 255. The CR Systems listed on the ROP Links Configuration Screen appear on the ROP Links Screen on the Remote Operations Panel. 5. Select Delete ROP Link to remove a CR System from the ROP Links Configuration Screen and the ROP Links list. 6. Select Save Changes or Save to All.


373/454

5/22/2018



Key Operator Functions > Remote Devices Administrative Analysis and Reporting Feature The CR Administrative Reporting Templates workbook replaces all previous versions. To transfer data from previous versions of the workbook to the new workbook, do the following: 1. Open new workbook file on your computer. 2. Select Import Data. 3. Navigate to the data contained in the previous workbook. 4. Select Open and proceed with instructions to Overwrite or Append. The EXCEL workbooks contain report templates for use with the Administrative Analysis and Reporting Feature of KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR Systems. Select the software option and the appropriate workbook for the data you want to report:

Required Option

Software

Workbook

Purpose

DIRECTVIEW Software V 5.1

CR Admin Templates

Reporting

Analyze and report general information about CR Operations.

DIRECTVIEW Total Quality Tool (TQT)

CR Admin TQT

Reporting

Analyze and report TQT data.

The CR Admin Reporting TQT workbook contains reports designed for the structure and content of the Total Quality Tool Software option only. Do not use this workbook for other reports.


374/454

5/22/2018


Remote Patient Data Entry System Remote Patient Data Entry System (RPDES) Remote Patient Data Entry Software is a software option for entering patient data at a

workstation. It is installed on the CR System and allows communication between a customersupplied computer workstation and the CR System. If the Remote Patient Data Entry option has been enabled, the Remote Access Software lets you access the Patient Input Screen to pre-populate the Work List. A radiographer-level password is required when logging into the CR from the customer PC. A RPDES must have a fixed IP address. If the PC is configured to use DHCP (dynamic IP address assignment on boot),or the link with the CR System may be lost when the PC is rebooted.

Setting up the RPDES at the CR

1. Load the Remote Access Software onto the customer's computer (see Remote Workstation Options section). 2. Follow the steps in Setting Up Remote Access to the CR or DR System. Entering Patient Information using the RPDES:

The Remote Patient Data Entry System saves time by letting you input patient information from a remote location. 1. Log on into the CR remotely. 2. Select the Remote Patient Data Entry menu bar. 3. Enter the patient information. 4. Select Save Changes. This clears all the fields and lets you enter the next patient record. You can retrieve the patient information at the CR System.


375/454

5/22/2018



376/454

5/22/2018


Local User Interface Local User Interface Main Menu The Local User Interface is available only with the KODAK DIRECTVIEW Classic and Elite CR Systems. It is accessed through the LCD display on the top of the machine. The menu is dynamic. The menu choices may appear in the following order, or a different order depending on the directional arrows you choose. To use the Local User Interface Menu:

Select the icon on the Classic or Elite System to access the menu selections. The functions are listed in the table below. Utilities

Volume Settings Control the volume of the following settings: •

Touch the icon on the Classic or Elite System to access the Utilities menu.

The response of selecting a button on the remote interface.

The sound of alarms on the CR System.

The sound of the BarCode Scanner.

The sound that occurs when you place a cassette in the cassette feed slot and it is ready to scan.

•

•

•

•

•

Button Click Alarms Bar-Code Read Cassette Loaded

Scanner Information

Scan Count

Scan Count is a

Laser Hours

consecutive count of scans on the machine.

Erase Lamp Status

Laser Hours is a

consecutive count of the hours the laser has operated.

•

Erase Lamp Status

gives a picture of the current performance of each pair of erase lamps in the machine.

Display Settings

•

Brightness

Brightness—Use the +


377/454

5/22/2018



and - buttons to control the brightness of the display on the interface.

•

Sleep

Sleep—Select the

interval for the interface to be active without being accessed.

Scan Mode Scan Modes are unique to the Classic and Elite CR Systems. Scan Modes affect large cassettes such as 35 x 35 cm and 35 x 43 cm.

High Speed Reduced Border Standard Speed

There are three scan modes you can set from the Local User Interface (not the Console): Standard Speed Mode—

Standard Resolution, High Resolution, Enhanced Resolution. High Speed Mode— High Standard Resolution,

Resolution, Enhanced Resolution. Reduced Border —Images

on 35 x 35 and 35 x 43 cm cassettes are captured with pixel sizes of 171 microns rather than 168 microns. The scanned image area increases slightly, producing borders smaller than those produced on other systems.

Active Console

IP address

Provides the name and IP address of the Classic or Elite System currently in communication with the Console.


378/454

5/22/2018


Local User Interface

Release Cassette

System Recovery Touch this button to release a jammed cassette in the Classic or Elite System. Erase Cassettes

Cassette Erased

will

Cassette Jam

be

Insert the cassette. Erasing begins automatically. The phosphor screen in the cassette is erased and released.


379/454

5/22/2018



Using the Volume Settings Tab The KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR Classic and Elite Systems have a local user interface built into the top of the machine. You can set the volume for the following signals by selecting the symbol:

Button Click

Alarms

Bar-Code

Cassette

Read

Loaded


380/454

5/22/2018


Long-Length Imaging Long-Length Imaging Menu Acquiring Images Performing a Long-Length Exam Optimizing a Long-Length Exam Entering Data for an LLI Exam Determining the SID LLI Techniques Scanning LLI Images on Capture Link System Assigning and Unassigning LLI Images CR Long-Length Grid Ratio Tips for Optimizing LLI Image Quality

Composite Images Printing Long-Length Images Viewing Long-Length Images No Composite Image Images are Stitched Incorrectly Distorted Composite Image


381/454

5/22/2018



Acquiring Images Long-Length Imaging

Performing a Long-Length Exam 1. Enter Patient data into the CR Modality the same way you would for a standard study. 2. Select a View or a Procedure. 3. Bar-code one of the cassettes used in the study. 4. Select Save Changes. 5. Select the number of Long-length Cassettes used. 6. Bar-code the remaining cassettes. You can override the default SID setting before processing the cassettes in the CR System by selecting one of the thumbnails and then the More Image Data Tab. There may be a distortion at the seam line of the composite image if the SID used is not within plus or minus 1 cm of the actual SID used. When all of the cassettes have been processed in the CR System, the composite image will automatically begin to process. Five image icons always appear for each long-length vertical exposure regardless of the number of cassettes used. If there are three icons representing cassettes 2, 3, and 4, the last is the composite image. The fifth cassette icon remains as a placeholder if it is not used. Three image icons always appear for each portable long-length exposure. For example, three icons would represent images 1, 2, and the stitched image.

The composite image is represented by the fifth image placeholder for the Vertical Cassettes and the third image placeholder for the Portable Cassette. The number of the cassettes used in the exposure appears on this image. The SID for the Portable Long-Length Cassette is determined automatically by the Position field selection on the Patient Input Screen (Supine or Erect). The defaults for these positions are set by the Key Operator. The radiographer can override this setting for the combined image body part and projection as desired from the More Image Data button on the Patient Input Screen. To use your CR System for long-length imaging, a Carestream Health Representative must install KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR System Software Version 5.1 or higher.

See also:

Optimizing a Long-Length Exam Entering Data for an LLI Exam Determining the SID Assigning and Unassigning Long-Length Images CR Long-Length Grid Ratio


382/454

5/22/2018


Long-Length Imaging

Long-Length Imaging

Optimizing a Long-Length Exam What kind of grid should I use?

Use the optional KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR Long-Length Grid (103 lp/in 8:1). Carestream Health has not tested other grids. If you use another grid, make sure that you evaluate the best conditions for image quality.

You can order extra Front Panels for mounting standard long-length grids. What kind of collimation is best?

Use vertical collimation for long-length imaging exams. The image stitching algorithm uses the non-image area at the sides of the phosphor screen to correctly align the image information. For best results, collimate approximately 1 in. (2.5 cm) inside the image target on the Front Panel or Grid. How many cassettes will I need?

Use the minimum number of cassettes required to capture the desired image. Large unexposed areas can degrade image quality. What kind of filtration is required?

Use an intensity profile compensation filter (wedge filter) to pre-attenuate images.


383/454

5/22/2018



Entering Data for an LLI Exam 1. Enter Patient data into the CR System the same way you would for a standard study. 2. If the Procedure Mapping option is enabled, enter the procedure codes for the long-length image on the Patient Input Screen. 3. Scan a CR long-length cassette bar code, always starting with 9105 for Long-length Vertical Cassettes and 9112 for Portable Cassettes. 4. Enter the number of long-length imaging cassettes used for the exposure. Make sure you select cassettes that have consecutive numbers, such as 1, 2, and 3. The software will not let you select cassettes that would leave a gap in the combined image, such as 1 and 3 or 1 and 4. 5. Enter the exam data 6. Select Save Changes. To change the number of cassettes selected:

You cannot change this selection, however you can select Delete View and start again. If you are processing a Long-Length Portable Cassette, a dialog box appears with the message: Choose a patient position for this long-length exam, Erect or Supine. How many icons should I see? Five image icons always appear for each long-length Vertical Cassette exposure, regardless of

the number of cassettes used. The composite image is represented by the fifth image placeholder for the Vertical Cassette. Three image icons always appear for each Portable long-length exposure. In this example,

three icons represent images 1, 2, and the stitched image. The composite image is represented as the third image placeholder for the Portable Cassette. The number of the cassettes used in the exposure series appears on the composite image. See also:

Performing a Long-Length Exam Optimizing a Long-Length Exam Determining the SID LLI Techniques


384/454

5/22/2018


Long-Length Imaging

Determining the SID The Source to Image Distance (SID) for the Portable Long-length Cassette is determined automatically when you select the Position field on the Patient Input Screen (Supine or Erect). You can override this setting for the View as desired from the More Image Data button on the Patient Input Screen. To enter the correct SID: Vertical Cassette Holder —Enter a value from 102 cm to 183 cm (40 to 72 in.) +/- 1 cm. Portable Cassette and Grid—Enter a value from 102 cm to 183 cm (40 to 72 in. ) +/- 1 cm .

The SID is one of the measurements used for pixel size calculations. If the calculated pixel size is not the actual pixel size, angular measurements made from the image display may not be accurate. It is imperative that measured SID is within +/- 1 cm of the value assigned in the system. See also:

Long-Length Imaging Configuration


385/454

5/22/2018



LLI Techniques The software looks for sharp edges in each of the sub-images to combine when applying the stitching algorithm. Therefore, if you collimate closely when performing a long-length exam, your results will improve. See also:

Assigning and Unassigning Long-Length Images CR Long-Length Grid Ratio


386/454

5/22/2018


Long-Length Imaging

Scanning Long-Length Images (LLI) on the Capture Link System CR Systems and DR Systems behave differently when processing LLI on the Capture Link System. See the DR Capture Link Online Help for more information about working with DR LLI. You can scan multiple CR Cassettes on multiple systems to reduce scanning time, and process the individual cassettes by stitching them together automatically. This workflow reduces the time to stitch the Long-Length image for review and delivery. Make sure that the Key Operator enables the Capture Link System option at the CR Systems. 1. Scan the cassette bar-codes. 2. Perform the exam. 3. Scan the cassettes on one or more machines in the Capture Link System. When the last image is acquired, stitching occurs at the machine where the first long-length cassette in the study was scanned. The image is stitched as soon as the last image is scanned, and is available for review at any Console or ROP on the Capture Link System. How long does it take to create a stitched image with Capture Link? Stitching starts as soon as the last cassette is scanned. For best workflow, scan all cassettes in parallel on various machines. See also:

Introducing the Capture Link System


387/454

5/22/2018



Assigning and Unassigning Long-Length Images (LLI) The process for assigning and unassigning long-length images is slightly different than the process we use for general radiography images. Follow the procedure carefully. Never delete the composite view icon or composite image while the sub-images are attached to the composite's patient record. Doing so will delete all of the images for that LLI exam. Unassigning Long-Length Images

1. Select one of the sub-images. 2. Select the Unassign Image button at the bottom of the screen. 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the remaining sub-images until all of the sub-images are unassigned. 4. Delete the composite image when all of the sub-images have been unassigned. Assigning Long-Length Images

1. Locate the correct patient record for the LLI exam and assign it an appropriate View icon. 2. Enter theID cassette of one of the unassigned LLI sub-images into the Cassette ID field. The cassette can beID found in the image's information bar in Image Review . The 5th position in the cassette ID corresponds to the cassette's position in the LLI Study. 3. After the cassette ID has been entered, select the number of cassettes used in the LLI Study. You do not need to enter the remaining cassette IDs. 4. Select the Unassigned Image button on the Main Menu screen to locate the unassigned LLI sub-images. 5. Select one of the unassigned LLI sub-images. 6. Select the Assign Image button. 7. Locate the patient record. 8. Select the existing view icon that corresponds to the position of the unassigned image. Remember that the 5th position in the cassette ID corresponds to the cassette's position in the LLI study. The software will not let you put the unassigned image into the wrong existing LLI view icon. 9. Repeat these steps until all of the LLI sub-images have been assigned into the correct patient record. The composite image will automatically stitch once all of the sub-images have been assigned. See also:

How do I enter data for a long-length image? How do I print long-length images? Why are the images stitched incorrectly? Why is the composite image distorted? What do I do when there is no composite image? How do I determine the SID?


388/454

5/22/2018


Long-Length Imaging

KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR Long-Length Grid KODAK DIRECTVIEW Long-Length Grid for Vertical Cassette Holder KODAK DIRECTVIEW Portable Grid

Performance for LLI image quality is optimized. evaluate the best conditions for image quality: If you choose another grid, make sure to

Grid Ratio: 8:1

103 LP

•

•

Handle the Grid with care. Dropping or bumping the Grid causes serious internal damage that produces permanent, unacceptable imaging artifacts.

Carestream Health has not tested other grids.


389/454

5/22/2018



Long-Length Imaging

Tips for Optimizing Long-length Image Quality There are several ways you can optimize the image quality of long-length images. •

Measure Source to Image Distance (SID) accurately: SID is one of the measurements used for pixel size calculations. If the calculated pixel size is

not the actual pixel size, angular measurements made from the image display may be inaccurate. Therefore, it is imperative that measured SID is within +/- 1 cm of the value assigned in the system. The KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR Long-Length Vertical Cassette Holder has a recommended SID of 183 cm (72 in.). You can set the default SID value from 150 cm to 229 cm (60 to 90 in.), depending on site and grid requirements. You must enter SID values in centimeters (cm). The KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR Long-length Portable Cassette has a recommended SID of 150 cm (60 in.). You can set the default SID value from 101 cm to 183 cm (40 to 72 in.), depending on site and grid requirements. You must enter SID values in centimeters (cm). Your staff radiographers can move the tube from the default position for an exam, but must override the default distance and enter the measured SID when entering exam information. The actual SID must be within +/- 1 cm of the value assigned in the system.


390/454

5/22/2018


Long-Length Imaging

Composite Images

Printing Long-Length Images The composite image is printed on a single piece of film. Use True-size printing to print the individual images at the same size they were acquired then fasten them together if desired. True-size printing significantly crops a composite image and is not normally used.

To use True-size imaging:

1. At the Patient Input Screen, select one of the sub-images. 2. At the Image Viewer screen, select the Crop Box Adjustment Tab. 3. Select True-size Print. 4. Select Save & Accept Image. 5. Repeat these steps for the remaining sub-images. See also:

How do I make a True-size print? Why are the images stitched incorrectly? Why is the composite image distorted? What do I do when there is no composite image? How do I determine the SID? How do I enter data for a long-length image? What techniques can I use with long-length imaging? How do I unassign and assign long-length images?


391/454

5/22/2018



Viewing Long-Length Images There are always five image icons that appear when a long-length series is created, even if only three or four will be used in the final image. To view long-length images:

View each image segment acquired.

View the processed composite image, which appears in a resolution to fit the screen.

With long-length imaging enabled, you can activate QA Mode just for the composite image. Doing so does not affect the QA Mode for standard images or long-length image segments.

•

•

•

There is no exposure index calculated for the composite image. To evaluate the technique, use the exposure index for one of the image segments. See also:

Viewing Modes


392/454

5/22/2018


Long-Length Imaging

No Composite Image If no composite image forms:

•

Make sure the Long-length option is enabled.

•

•

Print the individual segments True-size and tape them together. Unassign the sub-images and reassign them to produce a composite image.

See also:

Images are Stitched Incorrectly Distorted Composite Image Viewing Long-Length Images


393/454

5/22/2018



Images are Stitched Incorrectly To review images stitched in the wrong order:

•

The phosphor screen is in the wrong cassette.

•

The bar-code label on the cassette is incorrect. Place the image plate into the correct cassette or place the correct bar-code label on the cassette before further use. When one or more images are missing:

•

There were fewer images in the long-length exposure specified than were actually used. Unassign images and reassign or handle individually, then print.

To resolve stitching that is misaligned:

•

The Cassette Holder door could be ajar. Check that door is tightly closed.

•

Incorrect Source to Image Distance. Enter proper Source to Image Distance (SID).

•

Software problem. Call Service.

See also:

Assigning and Unassigning LLI Images


394/454

5/22/2018


Long-Length Imaging

Distorted Composite Image The composite image can become distorted when the incorrect Source to Image Distance (SID) is entered. Use the correct SID values;

Vertical Cassette Holder —Enter a value from 102 cm to 183 cm (40 to 72 in.) +/-1 cm.

Portable Cassette and Grid—Enter a value from 102 cm to 183 cm (40 to 72 in.) +/-1 cm.

•

•

See also:

Images are Stitched Incorrectly No Composite Image


395/454

5/22/2018



396/454

5/22/2018


Total Quality Tool What Is TQT? The DIRECTVIEW Total Quality Tool (TQT) is a comprehensive, quality assurance system

that evaluates various aspects of image quality on KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR Systems and KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR Cassettes. With a few quick steps, you can verify that the system is functioning within its normal operating specifications. TQT is an optional feature for DIRECTVIEW CR Systems. If the TQT option is not activated, contact Carestream Health for purchase information. Carestream Health recommends the use of the KODAK DIRECTVIEW Total Quality Tool as part of a quality control program for KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR Systems. Additional quality control tests should be incorporated into the quality control program as required by local regulations.

The KODAK DIRECTVIEW Total Quality Tool does not directly evaluate or provide a quality control capability for the X-ray equipment used or output destination devices (such as workstation monitors or film printers) connected with the CR System. Quality control procedures for other components in the imaging chain must be followed at the recommended intervals according to the manufacturer's instructions. The KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR System must be calibrated at the recommended intervals according to instructions from Carestream Health, Inc. All components in the imaging chain (such as the X-ray equipment, workstation monitors, or film printers) must be calibrated at the recommended intervals according to the manufacturer's instructions.


397/454

5/22/2018



Performing System Tests Cassette Test Frequency

Test all cassettes used in your system twice per year using the DIRECTVIEW CR Total Quality Tool’s cassette testing feature. System Image Quality Test Frequency

Perform CR System Image Quality Tests monthly on a dedicated cassette to assure that the test results obtained accurately reflect the CR System’s operating condition. If dedicated cassettes are not available, choose a cassette of each size, then verify the quality of these cassettes using the CR Total Quality Tool’s cassette testing feature. Make sure to use the same cassettes each time you test. You can test more than once per month. However, the Test Results Graphs show a maximum of 13 results, representing the recommended testing for one year (12 monthly and one yearly test). If you test more frequently, the last 13 results that are displayed will represent less than one year’s data. CR System Tests That May be Performed: Recommended Interval

Test

Quality Control Test

Comment

Daily

Erase Cassettes-Refer to Erase Cassette information in the CR System Hardware Guide

For cassettes that are used infrequently or if unintended X-ray exposure is suspected

Once per week or as recommended by manufacturer

CR SystemWorkstation Display Calibration CR SystemPrinter/Film Calibration

Once per month, every 200 exposures, or as necessary

CR Cassette/Screen inventory, Inspection, and Cleaning

See also:

What is TQT? Performing System Tests Testing Cassettes Appending the Session


398/454

5/22/2018


Total Quality Tool

Testing Cassettes Test all of your cassettes at least twice a year using the Total Quality Tool for General Radiography. You can test all your cassettes at once or extend the tests over a period of time. Tests on multiple machines can be accumulated, consolidated, and reported over an indefinite period of time. This feature lets you perform long-term trend analysis. Test your KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR Cassettes to verify that the cassette quality is within acceptable limits. To begin test procedures:

1. Obtain a complete list of cassette IDs for all cassettes in your inventory. 2. Answer the following questions:

Has someone already started a cassette test?

Which cassettes have not been tested?

Should test results for the cassettes you want to test be appended to the previous session or should you start a new session?

•

•

•

This information will help you decide whether a cassette needs to be tested and if your test results should be part of the previous testing session or the start of a new session. See also:

What is TQT? Appending the Session


399/454

5/22/2018



Selecting a Test Phantom Select the phantom that matches the size and type of cassette you are testing. Phantoms for use with CR Total Quality Tool for General Radiography come with a molded plastic tray to test the following DIRECTVIEW CR Cassettes: •

35 x 43 cm 24 x 30 cm

18 x 24 cm

35 x 35 cm

15 x 30 cm

•

•

•

•

Phantom Tray

See also:

What is TQT? Appending the Session


400/454

5/22/2018


Total Quality Tool

Positioning a Test Phantom Test phantoms must be positioned specifically for the size and type of the phantom. A guide has been developed to position the phantoms accurately and repeatedly during testing based on the size and type of cassette being tested. The molded plastic phantom tray contains three overlapping recessed areas, so you can fit different size cassettes securely in the tray before placing the Test Phantom inside the tray.

Positioning Tray and Phantoms

35 x 43 cm, 24 x 30 cm, or 18 x 24 cm cassettes fit squarely in specially designed slots and do not require special orientation.

35 x 35 cm and 15 x 30 cm cassettes must be positioned so that the center targets on the test phantom are exposed.

When the cassette and Test Phantom are positioned properly, the test images will be oriented as shown:

•

•

•


401/454

5/22/2018



See also:

What is TQT? Selecting a Test Phantom


402/454

5/22/2018


Total Quality Tool

Total Quality Tool

Appending the Session When you start a new TQT testing session, all previous data becomes inaccessible. If you want all of the cassettes in your inventory to be tested and organized under one session, check and verify that every cassette has been tested at least once. 1. Check the cassette IDs on your inventory against the IDs displayed on the Cassette Screen Test Results page. The Cassette Screen Test Results page displays the date, time, cassette ID, size and type of each cassette tested as well as individual subtest results. You can see those cassettes that have already been tested and those that still need to be tested. 2. Look at the Total # Cassettes Tested field on the Cassette Screen Test Page 3. This counter includes each tested cassette only once; multiple tests on a cassette are excluded from its total. When the Total Number of Cassettes Tested equals the total number of cassettes in your inventory, you have tested all cassettes at least once and can end the session. Before running a cassette test, decide whether the results should be part of a new session or appended to the previous session. To append to a previous session, select the Append to Previous Session check box.


403/454

5/22/2018



Exposure

Determining the Exposure It is not necessary to determine the exposure setting each time an image test is performed, but remember that exposure settings are only valid for the particular X-ray source for which they are determined. Once you have determined the exposure setting, you can use it for all Total Quality Tool image tests on that specific unit until the X-ray equipment is serviced or recalibrated. Those settings will no longer be valid and will have to be established again. To determine the exposure for TQT for General Radiography:

Use this technique to expose General Radiography cassettes for TQT testing. 1. Turn on the X-ray equipment and the collimator light on the X-ray tube. 2. Attach 0.5 mm Copper and 1 mm Aluminum filtration to the bottom of the X-ray tube. Tape the filters if necessary. 3. Two filters are provided (and can be stored) in the Test Phantom’s protective case. 4. Collimate the beam so that the edges of the tray are within the beam of light, fully exposing the dosimeter. 5. Place a lead sheet or a lead apron between the floor and the phantom tray. Place a dosimeter calibrated for (80 kV) centered on top of the tray. 6. Use the following specifications for the initial setup of the X-ray equipment:

80 kVp

40 mAs

•

•

80 kVp (±1) is mandatory. You can adjust the mAs to produce the correct exposure level. The dosimeter should show an exposure level of 0.0 mR ± 0.2.

If the mR reading is lower than the specification, increase the mAs setting on the X-ray equipment.

If the mR reading is higher than the specification, decrease the mAs setting on the X-ray equipment.

If the dosimeter displays a reading of 10.0 mR ± 0.2, record the reading.

•

•

•

7.

Expose the dosimeter three more times to verify consistency. All three readings should be within 0.5 mR.

See also:

What Is TQT?


404/454

5/22/2018


Total Quality Tool

Collimating for TQT Testing The field of exposure must completely cover the cassette's surface area for proper collimation for General Radiography. Position of the dosimeter:

See also:

What Is TQT?


405/454

5/22/2018



System Testing

Using the Total Quality Tool Main Page When you open the Total Quality Tool (TQT) and run a test, you begin a new session. To use the Total Quality Tool Main Page:

Select and run image tests and view test results.

Discard results of the last test performed in the current session.

Start a new session or append to the last session.

•

•

•

Access a summary of prior test results.

•

Access another page for testing individual cassettes.

•

Tests Phantom Image Test

Tests the image quality of the system. The calculated exposure of appropriate Test Phantom is required. (Use a cassette exposed with a standard dose phantom.) Insert the cassette when prompted to Load Cassette.

Flat Field Image Test

Tests Field Uniformity, Streaks, and Speed Deviation. Once the Phantom Image Test is complete, TQT automatically prompts you to Load Cassette for the Flat Field Image Test. Use the same exposure settings as the Phantom Image Test, but do not use a Test Phantom.

Erased Image Test

Automatically prompts to Load Cassette for Erased Image Test. The Erase Image test is performed using erased cassettes only and does not require an X-ray exposure.

System Noise Test

Automatically prompts to Load Cassette. System Noise tests are performed using erased cassettes only and do not require an X-ray exposure.

Discard Test

Discards the results of the last test performed in the current session.

Cassette Test

Opens Cassette Screen Test page for Flat Field Image Test.

Window/Level

Identifies artifacts in the image. TQT images can be transferred to the CR System and viewed on the image viewer.

Results

View Results Page 1 Phantom Image Test View Results Page 2 Flat Field Test Erased Image Test


406/454

5/22/2018


Total Quality Tool

System Noise Test Cassette Size

Lets you use the keyboard to select the size and type of the cassette you are testing.

Main Menu

Select the Main Menu button to close the Total Quality Tool, end the current session, and return to the CR System Main Menu.

Back

Select Back to return to the previous page within the current session.

See also:

What Is TQT? Performing System Tests Testing Cassettes Selecting a Test Phantom Positioning a Test Phantom


407/454

5/22/2018



Performing Phantom Tests for General Radiography To create a Phantom Image Test:

1. Erase all cassettes to be tested. 2. Turn on the X-ray equipment and the collimator light on the X-ray tube. 3. Place the cassette tube-side-up in the phantom tray on the floor. 4. Make sure that the cassette labels are positioned exactly as shown in How to Orient a Test Phantom (for TQT for General Radiography). 5. Move the X-ray tube to 180 cm (72.0 in.) above a clear area of the floor. 6. Center the tray edges within the collimator light. 7. Attach 0.5 mm Copper and 1 mm Aluminum filtration (supplied) to the bottom of the X-ray tube. Use tape to secure the filters, if necessary.

8. Position the copper filter next to the tube. Use the exposure information as prepared in Determining the Exposure. 9. Position the test phantom on the tray. See Positioning a Test Phantom. 10. Expose the cassette. See Determining the Exposure. 11. Wait 5 minutes before scanning the cassette to ensure a constant Exposure Index. 12. Start the Total Quality Tool. See Using the Total Quality Tool Main Page. 13. Select the Phantom Image Test button. 14. When you see the Load cassette message, load the cassette you exposed for the selected test. All cassettes to be tested must be erased first. Do not use a Bucky or grid during this procedure. See also:

Determining the Exposure Positioning a Test Phantom


408/454

5/22/2018


Total Quality Tool

Performing the Erased Image Test

•

•

Correct operation of the CR system requires that the stimulated light signal be proportional to the X-ray exposure. Light measured from an exposed CR cassette must not be influenced by previous exposures or by extraneous light sources in the CR System.

Stray light can result from inadequate filtration of the laser light or from light leaks in the CR system cabinet. This test should be done with the highest level of ambient lighting that will be used in normal operation of the CR system. In this test, the signal from a fully erased CR cassette is used to verify adequate erasure and the absence of stray light sources.

For this test, the same cassette that was used for the uniformity test is re-scanned. Because exposure level dependent erasure is the final step of the reading process, the cassette should be fully erased when reading is completed. Code values read from the cassette are spatially filtered to eliminate outliers due to small dust particles. The maximum code value in the resulting data is found.

•

To perform the Erased Image Test:

•

Rescan the cassette from the Flat Field Test. The Erased Residual results are reported in the Total Quality Tool as the average code value for the erased cassette.

Corrective Action

Verify that the screen was erased.

Verify that there are no bright light sources near the CR System.

Repeat the test.

If failure condition persists, call Service.

•

•

•

•

See also:

Flat-Field Image Tests What Is TQT?


409/454

5/22/2018



Understanding the System Noise Test

•

•

System Noise is measured only with the KODAK DIRECTVIEW Total Quality Tool because the CR System operates in a special hardware mode in which the signal associated with system electronic noise is amplified and measured. The erased cassette is scanned a second time with the CR System in this hardware configuration. The full 2-D noise power spectrum is computed for the resulting image and the 1-D spectra parallel to the fast- and slow-scan directions are estimated. Median methods are used to estimate the average of each of the 1-D noise power spectrum over spatial frequency. This technique is insensitive to noise spikes. The global maximum of the full 2-D noise power spectrum is then estimated.

To perform the System Noise Test:

•

Rescan the cassette from the Erased Image Test. The System Noise Test Results are reported in the Total Quality Tool. Fast-Scan System Noise

o

Slow-Scan System Noise

o

Overall System Noise

o

See also:

Performing the Erased Image Test What Is TQT?


410/454

5/22/2018


Total Quality Tool

Cassette Testing

Cassette Testing Menu Testing Cassettes with TQT Flat-Field Image Tests Performing a Flat-Field Image Test Best Results from Cassette Testing Viewing Test Result Indicators Reported Cassette Test Results How to Export Data


411/454

5/22/2018



Testing Cassettes with TQT 1. At the Key Operator Functions menu, select Total Quality Tool. 2. Select Cassette Test to open the Cassette Screen Test page. 3. Make sure each cassette has a Flat-field image. 4. Test one size and type of cassette at a time. The results will be grouped according to cassette size and type, making it easier to view and find results for a particular cassette. 5. If the cassette test fails, set the cassette aside and retest it after you have tested the remaining cassettes in a session. Retesting all failed cassettes at once isolates duplicate tests at the end of your session results, rather than having them dispersed throughout your session. See also:

Performing a Flat-Field Test


412/454

5/22/2018


Total Quality Tool

Flat-Field Image Test Computed Radiography requires that the code value at each pixel accurately reflects the X-ray exposure at each location. Flat-field exposures should result in a uniform response from the CR System, and they provide the most stringent test for many common image artifacts that can occur in CR Systems. Flat-field exposures are used for the following tests of uniformity and artifacts: Field Uniformity

Maximum code value difference between sub-images. Corrective Action: Verify that the cassette is properly exposed and not under-collimated. If heel effect is satisfactory and a FAIL condition persists, call Service.

Line Noise

Position

A code value representing the RMS pixel variations associated with wobble in the galvonometer mirror. Corrective Action: Verify that the cassette is properly exposed and not undercollimated. Verify that the exposure conditions are correct. Repeat the test. Record values. Call Service. Exposure Conditions: 0.5 mm Cu + 1 mm Al filtration 80 kVp 10 mR +/- 0.2

Banding

Caused by periodic fluctuations in the slow scan direction. Reported as the code value representing the magnitude of pixel variations with reference to slow scan velocity. Corrective Action: Call Service.

Chatter

May result from inadequate lubrication of the lead screw. This results in fluctuations in the slow-scan direction that are not related to the pitch of the slow scan. Reported as a code value representing pixel variations associated with chatter in the slow scan assembly. Corrective Action: Call Service.

Streaks

Both the location (pixel or line number) and code value are calculated to analyze deviations from the background (slow-scan streaks and fast-scan streaks). Corrective Action: Check for streaks or lines on the cassette.


413/454

5/22/2018



Clean the screen. Look for scratches. Call Service.


414/454

5/22/2018


Total Quality Tool

Performing a Flat-Field Image Test To create a Flat-Field Test Image:

1. Make sure the cassette is erased. 2. Turn on the X-ray equipment. 3. Collimate the beam of light so that the edges of the light fall on the outer edges of the cassette. 4. Expose the cassette using the same positioning, filter, and exposure values used to create the Phantom Test Image, but do not use the test phantom. See Performing a Phantom Image Test. 5. Make sure the cassette contains a Flat-field image. See Flat-Field Image Tests. 6. At the Cassette Screen Test page, select Flat-field Image Test. 7. When you see the message Load Cassette, load the cassette with the Flat-field exposure into the CR System. 8. At the Processing Complete message, check the result for each listed subtest. 9. Repeat steps 5-8 until all cassettes are tested. See also:

Flat Field Test Failure


415/454

5/22/2018



Best Results from Cassette Testing To make the most of your cassette testing, follow these suggestions.

•

Make sure each cassette contains a flat-field image.

•

Test and one type, size and typeitofeasier cassette at a and time.find The results be grouped according to cassette size making to view results forwill a particular cassette.

•

Retest all failed cassettes at once to isolate duplicate tests at the end of your session.

Do not load a cassette until AFTER you have initiated the testing process by selecting Flat-Field Image Test. Wait for the system message "Load Cassette" and then load the cassette.

See also:

Cassette Testing Menu Testing Cassettes with TQT Flat-Field Image Tests Performing a Flat-Field Image Test Viewing Test Result Indicators Reported Cassette Test Results


416/454

5/22/2018


Total Quality Tool

Viewing Test Result Indicators Indicator Status

Indicator Color

Results

Recommendations

Ready

Gray

Normal

Ready to cassette.

accept

Pass

Green

Normal

Ready to cassette.

accept

Pass

Amber

Passed but approaching the specification limit

See Troubleshooting.

Fail

Red

Outside of the specification

See Troubleshooting.

limit NA

Purple

Invalid result due to invalid cassette, invalid test image, or incorrect exposure

Check for orientation Phantom.

proper of

Check for proper exposure level. Check for proper filtration at the tube. Check the field of exposure. Repeat the test.


417/454

5/22/2018



Reported Cassette Test Results For each cassette scanned, the following results are reported: Cassette ID

Listed for each cassette measured.

Speed Deviation Field Uniformity Error

Reported as a code value. Reported as the maximum code value difference between the sub-images.

Slow-Scan Streaks

The largest amplitude streak is reported as a code value.

Fast-Scan Streaks

The largest amplitude streak is reported as a code value.

Corrective Action

Inspect the screen for damage.

If the CR System has passed all four image tests, any cassettes that fail one or more of the cassette tests should be set aside.

Clean the screen using the cleaning instructions provided in the CR Cassette Instruction Sheet. Repeat the test. If the cassette still fails, it should be removed from use.

See also:

Testing Cassettes with TQT Best Results from Cassette Testing Viewing Test Result Indicators


418/454

5/22/2018


Total Quality Tool

Results

Using Results (Page 1) Troubleshooting TQT Test Results Phantom Image Test Failure


419/454

5/22/2018



Using Results (Page 2) Flat Field Test Failure Performing the Erased Image Test System Noise Test Failure See also: Troubleshooting TQT for General Radiography


420/454

5/22/2018


Total Quality Tool

How to Export Data Cassette test results are organized into sessions so that data can be easily maintained, viewed, and exported. You can save test results in one session by appending test results until all your cassettes have been tested, or you can test your cassette inventory over multiple sessions. When a session is complete, you can export the results and then start a new session. 1. Select the Export button in the bottom left corner of the screen. 2. Select the destination drive to save your data. 3. Select OK. See also:

Exporting Data Using Administrative Analysis and Reporting Software


421/454

5/22/2018



Additional Tests

Cassette Inventory and Inspection Cassette inventory and inspection should be the first task on your list when performing a series of Total Quality Tool tests. Do the following:

Inventory and inspect the equipment you are going to test.

Make sure that the inventory includes everything on the itemized list of components, accessories, options and user manuals purchased.

Check that the CR System and accessories are properly installed. Make sure that you have the correct number of cassettes of each type and size.

Inventory and inspect all cassettes and screens.

Examine each cassette visually for external defects.

•

•

•

•

•

•

For screens, see the instruction sheet that comes with the KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR Cassette for instructions on inspecting, handling, and cleaning phosphor screens.

During acceptance testing, select several cassettes and set aside for subsequent quality control testing.


422/454

5/22/2018


Total Quality Tool

Cleaning Cassettes

Storage phosphor screens are not subject to physical contact in normal use and consequently do not require a routine procedure surface cleaning.

Clean storage phosphor screens when you have identified a specific artifact associated with

screen surface contamination (such as persistent dust or fingerprint artifacts). Clean storage phosphor screens according to the manufacturer's instructions (available separately).

Open each cassette and extract the screen to inspect for dust or scratches.

Record all the cassette numbers, the corresponding phosphor screen identification numbers, and any notes on their condition. Note surface defects and scratches on the cassette inventory record.

Carefully close and latch each cassette.

•

•

•

•

•

•


423/454

5/22/2018



Film-Printer Calibration Test 1. Verify the printer and CR System combination. 2. Calibrate each printer using the procedures provided by the manufacturer. Optical density measurements require a calibrated densitometer. 3. Perform printer calibration/CR System verification:

Periodically per the printer manufacturer’s recommendations as part of a quality control program.

Whenever CR System components or printer are serviced or replaced, including software upgrades.

Whenever you observe an unexpected change in image quality.

•

•

•

To verify the CR System and Printer Calibration:

1. See Key Operator Functions > Monitor Calibration for a sample of the SMPTE pattern. 2. Acquire and label the printed film. 3. Measure and record the optical density for each test patch. Two patches are labeled 50%. Results

Make sure that the plot of density versus percentage is linear and the range of density (the maximum density minus the minimum) is between 2.5 and 3.1.

Compute the least-squares fit of density with respect to the fractional of full response shown on the SMPTE pattern (i.e., treat the 10% patch as 0.10).

Make the slope of this line between 2.5 and 3.1 with no point deviating by more than 0.3 log

density from the line. Examine the image of the entire SMPTE pattern for printer artifacts, such as lines, banding or density non-uniformities.

•

•

•

•


424/454

5/22/2018


Total Quality Tool

Workstation Display Calibration Test 1. Verify the display calibration and combination CR System—Workstation Display Calibration for all workstations that you use. 2. Calibrate the workstations by following the recommendations provided by the manufacturer.

Verify the gray scale calibration of the CR System—workstation display combination.

Use a Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (SMPTE) pattern RP-133 as seen in Key Operator Functions > Monitor Calibration.

•

•

Display luminance measurements require a calibrated photometer. 3. Perform the Display Calibration—CR System Verification:

Periodically per the display device manufacturer’s recommendations as part of a quality control program.

Whenever components of the CR System or workstations are serviced or replaced, including software upgrades.

Whenever you observe an unexpected change in image quality.

•

•

•

To verify grayscale calibration:

1. See the CR System Online Help for information on generating and sending the SMPTE pattern to the workstation. 2. Display, magnify, and position the SMPTE pattern’s image to fill the center of the image display area with each of the 14 SMPTE test patches labeled with a percentage value (0%, 10%, etc.). 3. Measure and record the luminance for each test patch. Two patches are labeled 50%, although only one is used. Results

Make sure that the plot of logarithm (base 10) of the luminance versus percentage is linear and the range of log luminance (the maximum log luminance minus the minimum) is between 2.5 and 3.1.

Compute the least-squares fit of log luminance with respect to the fractional of full response shown on the SMPTE pattern (i.e., treat the 10% patch as 0.10).

Make the slope of this line between 2.5 and 3.1 with no point deviating by more than 0.3 log luminance from the line.

Examine the image of the entire SMPTE pattern for monitor artifacts, such as lines, banding, or density non-uniformities.

•

•

•

•


425/454

5/22/2018



Troubleshooting

Phantom Image Test Failure Select the test name from the list below to view a description of the problem and suggested corrective action. Pixel Size Test Pixel Size is the average center-to-center distance between pixels.

Image segmentation methods are used to automatically detect the location of the edges of the apertures along the top, bottom, right, and left of the phantom test image. For each side of the image, a linear "least-squares" fit of the detected locations is made to the known relative locations of the edges. The average slope that you calculated for the top and bottom rows of apertures measures the average fast-scan pixel size, and the average slope calculated for the left and right columns of apertures measures the average slow-scan pixel spacing. Pixel Size is reported as a percentage deviation in Pixel Size Error Fast and Pixel Size Error

Slow.

Corrective Action

Note whether Pixel Size Error is Fast or Slow.

Verify that the phantom is properly exposed and not under-collimated.

Repeat the test and record any failed values.

•

•

•

Aspect Ratio Test

The pixel Aspect Ratio is calculated for the left side, the middle, and the right side of scan lines in the fast-scan direction. The local fast-scan pixel size is measured by the center-to-center distances between apertures in the Test Phantom. Left Side

Use the first and third apertures.

Center

Use apertures on either side of the center.

Right Side

Use first and third apertures from the end of the scan line.

The Aspect Ratio is then computed as the ratio of the average slow-scan pixel size to the local fast-scan pixel size. The Aspect Ratio Error is the percentage deviation from the designed aspect ratio (unity) for the left, middle and right sides of the image. The Average Aspect Ratio Error is computed as the ratio of the Average Slow-Scan Pixel Size to the Average Fast-Scan Pixel Size. Aspect Ratio is reported as the Aspect Ratio Error Left, Aspect Ratio Error Middle, Aspect Ratio Error Right, and Aspect Ratio Error Average each expressed as a percentage of the

designed aspect ratio.


426/454

5/22/2018


Total Quality Tool

Corrective Action

Note if the Aspect Ratio Error is Left, Middle, Right, or Average.



•

•

•

Scan Linearity Scan Linearity is the measurement of the deviation of the aperture locations from their

expected locations, based on the linear least-squares fit of the measured locations used to compute the Pixel Size. From these measurements, the variation in scan speed with position is calculated for each direction. The deviation from Scan Linearity is calculated as the maximum deviation of scan speed from the average speed. The Fast-scan Speed Error and the Slow-scan Speed Error are expressed as a percentage of the average speed. This measure of Scan Linearity represents the maximum possible percentage error in length measurements that could be made by using mean pixel spacing values. Scan Linearity is reported as the peak-to-peak Fast-Scan Speed Error and Slow-Scan Speed Error expressed as a percentage of the average scan speed in the respective direction. Corrective Action

Note if the Scan Linearity is Fast Scan or Slow Scan.



•

•

•

Exposure Response

Computed Radiography requires that the code value at each pixel accurately reflects the X-ray exposure at that location. KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR Systems produce raw code values that are linearly related to the logarithm of X-ray exposure. One of the most important steps in quality control testing is to verify the large-area exposure response linearity, since all other tests will be done in terms of these code values. The average response of three uniform areas of the phantom test image is computed. Image segmentation methods are used to identify three areas of the image. The large square area in the center of the phantom test plate has minimal attenuation. The smaller square area directly below the central square has uniformly high attenuation. Areas to the left and right of the central square have a middle value of attenuation. In each of these areas, the average of the code values in a square 2.0 x 2.0 cm is computed. The expected attenuation of the phantom test plate is used to predict the exposure response for these three levels of attenuation under the specified X-ray beam conditions. The Exposure Response Test results are reported in the Total Quality Tool. The error in the average code value (CV) for each of the three levels of attenuation is reported in the Total Quality Tool as: Low-Exposure Response Error (CV), Mid-Exposure Response Error (CV), and High-Exposure Response Error (CV). These are compared with the expected code values based on the predicted attenuation of the test phantom.


427/454

5/22/2018



Corrective Action


Verify that the exposure conditions are correct:

•

•

0.5 mm Cu + 1 mm Al filtration

o

80 kVp

o

10 mR ± 0.2 (0.0876 mGy ± 0.00175 mGy)

o

If high-exposure result is PASS and mid- or low-exposure results are FAIL, check kVp.

If high-, mid- and/or low-exposure results are FAIL, check mR (mGy).

Inspect the screen. If the screen has discolored, repeat the test with a second cassette.

Verify that the phantom is oriented properly on the cassette.

Repeat the test and record failed values.

Call Service.

•

•

•

•

•

•

Noise Image Noise depends on factors such as:

Exposure Technique

Performance of the CR System

Image Processing

Display

•

•

•

•

Evaluate noise under well-defined exposure conditions and in a way that is independent of arbitrary image processing and display choices. Because noise measurements are very sensitive to image artifacts, they normally require specially prepared materials and laboratory conditions. The Total Quality Tool uses algorithms that distinguish between artifacts and the underlying noise. The Noise test results are reported in the Total Quality Tool. The noise results are reported as the estimated mean pixel deviation for each of the three exposure levels used for the Exposure Response test. Corrective Action


Verify that the exposure conditions are correct:

•

•

0.5 mm Cu + 1 mm Al filtration o 80 kVp o

10 mR ± 0.2 (0.0876 mGy ± 0.00175 mGy)

o

If high-exposure result is PASS and mid- or low-exposure results are FAIL, check kVp.

If high-, mid- and/or low-exposure results are FAIL, check mR (mGy).

Inspect the screen. If the screen has discolored, repeat the test with a second cassette.

•

•

•


428/454

5/22/2018


Total Quality Tool



Call Service.

•

•

•

MTF

The best predictor of CR system sharpness is obtained from measurements of spatial frequency response. This measurement is also called the Modulation Transfer Function or MTF. Total Quality Tool measures MTF automatically. To be a useful measure of the CR system, it is important to minimize the influences of other components of the image chain, such as the exposing equipment and the display devices. Pre-sampling MTF measurements are obtained from the edges of the slightly slanted square in the middle of the Test Phantom image. Image segmentation methods are used to automatically determine the edge locations. The centers of the transition for a series of adjacent lines are estimated and fit to a straight line. The pixels on each line are then displaced accordingly, and a sub-pixel representation of the Line Spread Function (LSF) is obtained. The pre-sampled MTF is computed from the fourier transform of the sub-pixel LSF. The MTF test results are reported in the Total Quality Tool. MTF is reported at two frequencies for each of the two scan directions. These frequencies depend on pixel size. The results reported by the Total Quality Tool include:

the Fast-scan MTF @ 95% of Nyquist

the Fast-scan MTF @ 50% of Nyquist

the Slow-scan MTF @ 95% of Nyquist

the Slow-scan MTF @ 50% of Nyquist

•

•

•

•

Corrective Action


Inspect the phantom for damage such as kinks or creases.


Call Service.

•

•

•

•

Pixel Position Flat-Field (Uniform) exposures provide the most stringent subjective test for many common

image artifacts that occasionally occur in CR Systems. However, there are some artifacts that cannot be detected with flat-field exposures. Because CR images are read with a scanning laser beam, the relative timing of data acquisition for each line of data is critical if the pixels are to be aligned in adjacent lines. Normally this alignment is maintained to a very small fraction of a pixel. You can detect sub-pixel shifts in pixel position between adjacent lines before these effects become large enough to affect image quality in clinical images.


429/454

5/22/2018



The linear features that are used for MTF measurements are also used to assess the line-to-line fluctuation in pixel placement. Image segmentation methods are used to determine locations of the edges of the central square in the test phantom image. The centers of the transition for a series of adjacent lines are then estimated from the code values along each line. These locations are fit to a straight line and the deviations from linearity are computed. The RMS error of the transition centers from the fitted line is used as a measure of the line-to-line pixel placement error. The Pixel Position RMS test results are reported in the Total Quality Tool.

•

Pixel Position RMS is reported as the RMS error in the line-to-line pixel placement as a fraction of the Pixel Size.

Corrective Action

Record results.

Call Service.

•

•


430/454

5/22/2018


Total Quality Tool

Flat-field Test Failure Select the name of the test from the list below to view a description of the problem and suggested corrective action. Field Uniformity Field Uniformity is computed by partitioning the image into an array of 5 x 5 sub-images. The

mean code value of each sub-image is computed. The Field Uniformity Error is reported as the maximum code value difference between the sub-images. Pass-fail criteria is based on mean code value deviation of the sub images for the appropriate cassette size. Corrective Action

X-ray heel effect can affect the test results. Verify that the X-ray heel effect is not significant.

Verify that the cassette is properly exposed and not under-collimated.

If heel effect is satisfactory and a FAIL condition persists, call Service.

•

•

•

Line Position Noise

During the CR reading process, randomly distributed variations from line to line occur in the image. This artifact is most easily observed at the beginning of fast scan lines. It is measured in terms of uncorrelated variations in the average code values at the beginning of each line. Line Position Noise is reported as a code value representing the RMS pixel variations associated with wobble in the galvonometer mirror. Corrective Action

Verify that the cassette is properly exposed and not under-collimated.

Verify that the exposure conditions are correct: o 0.5 mm Cu + 1 mm Al filtration

•

•

80 kVp

o

10 mR ± 0.2 (0.0876 mGy ± 0.00175 mGy)

o

Repeat the test.

Record values.

Call Service.

•

•

•

Banding Banding is caused by periodic fluctuations in the slow-scan direction. •

•

Slow-Scan Banding is reported as a code value representing the magnitude of pixel variations

with reference to slow-scan velocity. Corrective Action

•

Call Service.


431/454

5/22/2018



Chatter Chatter may result from inadequate lubrication of the lead screw. This results in quasi-periodic

fluctuations in the slow-scan direction that are not correlated with the pitch of the slow-scan. Slow-Scan Chatter is reported as a code representing the magnitude of pixel variations associated with chatter in the motion of thevalue slow-scan assembly. Corrective Action

•

Call Service.

Streaks Streaks may result from a number of possible causes. Isolated deviations from the background

are analyzed for correlations in the slow-scan and fast-scan directions. Both the location (pixel or line number) and amplitude (code value) of these are calculated. The largest magnitude Slow-Scan Streaks and Fast-Scan Streaks are reported as code values. Corrective Action

Check for streaks or lines on the cassette.

Clean the screen and look for scratches.

Call Service.

•

•

•


432/454

5/22/2018


Total Quality Tool

System Noise Test Failure To correct a System Noise Test Failure:

1. Verify that the screen was erased. 2. Verify that there are no bright light sources near the CR System. 3. Repeat the test. 4. If a failure condition persists, call Service.


433/454

5/22/2018



Total Quality Tool

Troubleshooting TQT for General Radiography To resolve a condition that results in a Warning or a Failure: Study the graphs. •

The graphs provided for each subtest make it easy to see if the results are a gradual trend or a sudden shift in performance.

•

Repeat the tests. Warnings and Failures could be the result of procedural errors, and should be verified by repeating the tests.

•

Determine the general cause. Determine whether the Warning or Failure is caused by the CR System or the cassette.

•

Take corrective action as appropriate. Keep running, based on independent evaluation of image quality.


434/454

5/22/2018


Utilities

Utilities Utilities Menu The Utilities Menu is accessed from the Main Menu. On this Help Screen, select the blue link in the table below to access the information for the desired topic. Quick Reference Change Password

How to Change Your Password

System Status

How to View the Status of System Communications

Software Updates

How to Install Software Updates

Image Recovery

How to Recover Images

Capture Link Status

How to Check the Capture Link Server Status


435/454

5/22/2018



Changing Your Password You can change your password at any time. Remember to create a password that conforms to the number and type of characters set for passwords in your facility by your Security Administrator. To change your password: 1. At the Main Menu, select Utilities.

2. Select Change Password. 3. Enter your old Password. 4. Enter your new Password. 5. Confirm your new Password by entering it again (exactly the same way). 6. Select the Change Password button. What if I have forgotten my password?

Contact Security Administrator. Your Security Administrator can reset your password so that you can the change it if needed.


436/454

5/22/2018


Utilities

Installing Software Updates Software updates are sent to the Modality from a remote location by your Service Representative. You will know when updates are available and have been sent for installation when an Updates Available button appears on the Main Menu. In addition, archived software updates are kept stored on the Archived Tab. To install software updates: 1. From the Main Menu, select Utilities. 2. Select Software Updates. 3. At the NEW Software Updates Screen, check the red or green color bars at the top of the screen. 4. When the Ready to Install light turns green, select Install Update. To understand the light code:

Ready to Install, green light—The prerequisites have been met for this update.

Prerequisites Not Met, red light— Further action required before this installation can begin.

•

•

To install software updates from a CD or USB drive:

•

If the updates are delivered on a CD or a removable USB drive, insert into the appropriate drive, select Find on Removable Media, and then select Install Update.

To meet software installation prerequisites:

1. View the Prerequisites on the lower half of the screen. 2. See which updates were installed. 3. Call Service. To delete a software update: Select the update file name and select the Delete Update button. •

To uninstall a software update:

•

Select the update file name and select the Uninstall Update button.

You must be logged in as a Key Operator to install software updates.


437/454

5/22/2018



Image Recovery on the Capture Link System When the Modality is configured for the Capture Link System but is not yet joined, it is in Standalone mode. A console is fully functional in Standalone mode. You can operate a Modality in Standalone mode if the Capture Link Server becomes unavailable and the individual Modality remains joined. If the Modality is no longer joined to the Capture Link Server, you do not lose access to the images that are located on the hard drive of each Console. However, the link between the image and its patient/exam data is broken, and must be restored before the image can be reviewed or delivered. To restore the link between an image and its patient/exam data when the machine has switched to Standalone mode:

1. From the Main Menu, select Utilities and Image Recovery. The following data appears in a row for each image: Accession Number

•

•

Patient ID


•

•

View Name

2.

Select the row(s) that represent the images you are looking for.

3.

Select Recover Checked Images. The Modality attempts to associate the image to a patient/exam. If the Modality cannot automatically associate the image to a patient/exam, the image will be unassigned.

See Assigning an Image For unassigned images, 1. Re-create the patient/exam image record (Query the local or remote Work List or enter data manually at the Patient Input Screen). 2. Assign the image to the patient and exam. 3. The data listed above appears in a row for each image. To restore the association between an image and its patient/exam data when the machine has returned to Capture Link Mode select Main Menu > Utilities:

See:Image Recovery to Capture Link 1. Use the filters to select the images in the system: All Studies, Need Approval, Unassigned Images, Failed Delivery, Pending Delivery, Need Destination, or Delivered Images. You can sort by Patient Last Name, Patient ID, Accession Number, Tech ID, or Acquisition Date. If you are in a Standalone mode and then join the Capture Link System, an image on your system will not be visible or accessible unless you use the Image Recovery to Capture Link utility.


438/454

5/22/2018


Utilities

The recovered image is retrieved but unassigned to a patient/exam record if there is no match of the Accession Number and Patient ID. 2. Select the image. 3. Selecta patient record from the RIS or create one manually. 4. Assign the image. See also: Rejoining the Capture Link System Re-delivering an Image Using Image Recovery to Capture Link List


439/454

5/22/2018



Using the Capture Link Server Status Screen The Capture Link Server Status Screen quickly lists what machines are connected to the Capture Link System, or what the network communication statuses of those systems are. To access it, from the Main Menu, select Utilities. To determine which devices are in the Capture Link System: View the Capture Link Server Status Screen list of the names and IP address of each

machine Console and server configured for the Capture Link System. Remote Operations Panels and other external devices are not listed. To determine whether there is a Capture Link connectivity problem:

•

Select Ping Devices. If there is a good connection, the light appears green.

o

If there is a problem with the connection, the light appears red.

o

To determine which types of connections you can check:

•

Network

Application

•

•

Database


440/454

5/22/2018


Utilities

Viewing the Status of System Communications Use this screen any time your Service Representative requests a report. Status of System Communications provides easy access to logs about the Modality. To access the logs:

1. Select the tab that Service requests:

Summary

.NET CLR

Hot Fixes

•

•

•

Assemblies

•

•

MIM Core

2. Select Snapshot Log Files. This button captures the current logs and dates them so that when they are retrieved later, they will identify the status of the system at that time. To tell if communication to the HIS/RIS is open:

Go to the Summary Tab and check the lights on the Device Column. If the light is green under HIS/RIS, the Modality is communicating with the HIS/RIS. To select the Log Files Snapshot button:

Select this button any time there are issues with the Modality performance, and every time you need to call Service.


441/454

5/22/2018



442/454

5/22/2018


Glossary

1 1 cm scale: When selected, a one centimeter (cm) scale is applied along a horizontal and vertical edge of an image.

A AC: Applications Consultant Accession Number: A DICOM term; it is a number assigned to an exam and linked to the site's billing system. Activate option: Install a floppy diskette, CD, or USB drive that contains codes that make the selected option immediately

available in the system. Assign image: Connect an image to patient information. Only Unassigned Images can be Assigned. auto associate: The automatic connection of a scanned image to the Patient Name and View currently active on the console.

B Back button: Returns you to the previous screen or function. If you have made changes, the Back button toggles to Cancel. Backup and Restore: Lets you save configurations to a removable device, and restore selected configurations into other

machines. Bar-Code: A series of black and white lines that represent data that can be scanned and digitized. Bar-Code Configuration: Change the way the bar code scanner reads the Accession Number, Tech ID, and Patient ID, and

Procedure Code. Begin Study button: Sends a message to the HIS/RIS that the study is started. Appears on the Patient Input Screen when

New Patient is selected. Body part: The area of the body that is imaged. Brightness: Makes an image lighter or darker.

C

Calibrate: To configure a monitor or touch screen to a standard, repeatable response. Cancel button: Returns you to the previous function without automatically saving changes; toggles to the Back Button after

you have selected Save Changes. The Cancel button displays the Confirm changes confirmation dialog. Capture Link System: In a Capture Link System, all patient records and all patient images from any device joined to the

Capture Link System are available for review and use on any device joined to the Capture Link System Cassette: The outer casing that contains the storage phosphor screen. The cassette is inserted into the CR System. Cassette ID: The number that identifies the cassette holding the storage phosphor screen on which the patient was exposed. Cassette Testing: TQT, requires a flat-field image. Change Destination Profile: Changes the automated process of selecting destinations for an image based upon user-

specified criteria. Change Profile: Changes the selected destinations for an image or study. Clear all Fields button: Removes all the information entered in the search criteria fields. Clipped Anatomy: Default reason for rejecting an image. Anatomy that was not captured because the cassette was mis-

aligned at exposure. Image data is physically missing from the image. Collimation: To restrict the size of the X-ray beam by reducing it, usually with lead shutters, to accurately localize the area of

interest on the patient and reduce the patient's overall exposure to radiation. Console: A Modality that is included in a Capture Link System CR System: Computed Radiography System, used to create digital radiographic images.


443/454

5/22/2018



D Default: Predefined information that is automatically applied, but which can be replaced with a specific selection. Delete All Patients button: A Key Operator function to delete all patient information on the system. There is no recovery from

this command. It deletes even protected records. Delivered: An image that has been accepted and sent to destinations such as a workstation or a printer is called a delivered

image. A delivered image cannot be modified unless it is copied, and then you can m odify the copy. Destination: A location where an image is sent. Destinations include laser printers and clinical and diagnostic workstations. DICOM: Digital Imaging and Communication in Medicine. Disk Manager: The automated function that controls storage space for images on the hard drive. Disk Manager deletes the

oldest images when the amount of free space reaches a Key Operator specified level. Dose Measurements: The measure of the amount of energy (using a dosimeter) deposited in tissue due to X-ray exposure. DR: Digital Radiography; the use of a photo conductor-based image capture method,

E Error Message: A message displayed in a dialog box or in the System Errors log that describes a problem that occurred

during the operation of the CR System. EVP: Enhanced Visualization Processing: a contrast enhancement algorithm contained within the IPL. Exam: A set of images, usually of the same body part, which are part of a procedure and have a common accession number.

A collection (set) consisting of a raw image, its versions, Exam Information, and Patient Information. Exam Information: Data pertaining to the way an exam is performed. Exam Type: View. body part and projection (from the Exam Information) and, optionally, position. Export: Transfer information from the CR or DR System so that it can be analyzed and used. Exposure Index: A numerical value computed from the average code value of those areas of the image data that are used by

the image processing algorithm to compute the optimal tonescale. External Device: A ROP or a RPDES that is connected to a CR or DR System, or a Capture Link Server. External Text Box: For a printed image, the area external to the image in which the user specifies information to be displayed.

When an external text box is used, the image area is reduced. Some printers may not support this feature.

F Failed to Deliver button: Displays a list of images that have not been successfully delivered to a destination. Find Study Locally button: Searches the modality database to locate all patient records meeting the criteria entered. Find Study Remotely button: Searches the HIS/RIS database to locate all patient records meeting the criteria entered. Flag: Mark an image for review by a Key Operator at a later time. Flat-field: An X-ray exposure that is made without use of a phantom image or a clinical image. Focus: Configurable, which field starts with the cursor.

G

Grid Detection and Suppression: The optional feature that automatically detects and suppresses grid lines from images. This

feature is configured for each view. GUI: Graphical User Interface - the user interface observed at the Modality monitor.

H Half-Value Layer: The thickness of a specified substance which, when introduced into the path of a given beam of radiation,

reduces the exposure rate by one-half. HVL is a measure of beam quality and usually is specified by millimeters of aluminum for diagnostic units. The higher the HVL, the more penetrating the X-ray beam.


444/454

5/22/2018


Glossary

HIS: Hospital Information System. HIS/RIS: See “HIS” and “RIS” - this term refers to both systems at a single site but does not imply that they a re linked, or even

exist on the same network. Histogram: The histogram is a graph of the distributions of pixel values in the image. The X-axis is exposure from low to high.

The Y -axis is frequency of occurrence.

I IHE: Integrated Healthcare Enterprise Image: A single picture. A data structure that contains image data, patient information, and information relating to the method

of creating the image data; in a DICOM-compliant format. Image Adjustment: The ability of the user to change the Image Processing using the following attributes: Brightness, Latitude,

Detail Contrast, Window /Level. Image Processing Library: The IPL contains the parameters and algorithms used to process images for optimal diagnostic

use. Image Receptor: For Computed Radiography, the image receptor is the phosphor screen. For DR, the image receptor is the

flat panel detector. Images not assigned: On the Main Menu, this button indicates the number of Unassigned Images currently in the system. Internal Text Box: For a printed image, the area within the image containing user-specified information about the patient and

exam. The user can specify the default and actual location and orientation of the Internal Text Box.

Inventory: Inventory includes everything on the itemized list of components, accessories, options and user manuals

purchased. IPL: The IPL contains the parameters and algorithms used to process images for optimal diagnostic use.

K Key Operator: The category of user authorized to administer the modality. They Key Operator may change the setup and

operation of the machine. kV: Kilovolts (thousands of volts) - measurement unit for x-ray beam strength. kVp: Kilovolts Peak. kVp Accuracy and Reproducibility: Test used to ensure that the indicated peak X-ray beam energy is accurate and

reproducible so that consistent X-ray output and contrast are maintained.

L Look: A preset appearance for an image that includes the elements of brightness, latitude, detail contrast, sharpness, and

noise reduction. LUT: Look-Up Table. A set of values that can be mathematically applied to the digital image which alters the look of the image.

The LUT is generated by the image processing algorithms.

M Magnification: With respect to film screen, 100% is the same size as film screen, 93% is 93% the size of a film screen. Mandatory Destination: A classification of Destinations. Images specified for delivery to a Mandatory Destination cannot be

deleted from the modality hard drive until the Mandatory Destination has received them. They Key Operator specifies which, if any, destinations are Mandatory Marker: An electronic identifier added to the im age that is printed and stored. mAs: Milliamp-seconds - measurement unit for the amount of X-ray energy delivered. Modality: The System that is in use, such as CR System or DR System. MPPS: MPPS is an element of the optional Scheduled Workflow software feature. The Scheduled Workflow feature

communicates with the Modality Performed Procedure Step Manager every time a procedure starts, ends, or is discontinued using the appropriate button on the Patient Input Screen.


445/454

5/22/2018



mR: Millirads - measurement unit for X-ray exposure. Multi-format: Placing 2, 3, or 4 images on a single print in lengthwise or crosswise format.

N Noise: Visible, low-contrast anomaly that appears in areas of low exposure in the image.

O On Focus Field: Refers to the data field currently selected or active. Options: Software programs and functions that are purchased in addition to base system software. An option must be

activated after purchase.

P Pass-through Mode: The operating mode in which the CR System accepts, processes, and routes the exam without user

intervention. Patient Information: The demographic data pertaining to a patient. Patient Information Bar: The box located beneath the displayed image that displays the patient information for the displayed

image.

Patient Input Screen: Used to enter patient information and set up exams for processing. Patient Query Screen: Used to locate Work List entries or patient studies. Enter search criteria to return a filtered list that

meet the criteria. Patient Work List Screen: The screen that lists Work List entries or patient studies. The list may be filtered using search

criteria. Phantom: A test object that simulates the average composition of various structures within a body part. Positioning: The art and skill the radiographer / technologist uses to adequately demonstrate the anatomy in different

projections. Prefix: When used with the barcode reading function, it is an optional character preceding the standard content of a printed bar

code. Prefixes and Suffixes are used when necessary to differentiate bar coded data fields. Print button: Sends an image to a selected printer. The profile set for the cassette and image typically has a printer selected. Processed Image: An image to which the image processing algorithms have been applied. Projection: The relative orientation of the anatomy to the X-ray beam. Examples include Lateral, Antero-posterior. Protected records: Patient and image records that are prohibited from being removed from the computer hard drive during the

normal operation of the Disk Manager process.

Q QA Mode: Operating mode where the user causes images to be delivered by Accepting them after reviewing them for quality.

R Radiolographer Technologist: Trained person who performs the radiographic examination that creates the images needed

for diagnosis. Radiopaque Marker: An identification label introduced into path of the X-ray beam that is permanently included in the image.

Often used to specify left or right laterality. Raw Image: Unprocessed Image. An image to which the image processing algorithms have not been applied. Redeliver image button: Select this button to deliver an image that has been delivered previously. The current destination

selection is used to redeliver an image. Reject: If you do not want to accept an image, and cannot modify it to your satisfaction, select Reject Image. The image moves

to the Rejected Image Screen. The image cannot be delivered to a workstation or a printer.


446/454

5/22/2018


Glossary

Result sort order: Specifies the sequence in which lists of information are sorted. Selections often include alphabetical or date

order sequence. RIS: Radiology Information System. ROP: Remote Operations Panel- an auxiliary device at which CR exams can be initiated and images can be reviewed. Routing: The act of transferring an image from the Modality to a specified destination.

S Scan Status Screen: The screen at which the progress of image scanning can be seen. Also includes control of Cassette

Erasing, Cassette Transport release, Erase Lamp status. Search: To enter criteria to find a Work List or patient record. The more specific the criteria you enter, the narrower the search.

If you do not enter any criteria, a list of all records is returned. Select Destination button: Lets you change the destinations that will receive the image. Session: A set of tests for cassette quality. When you start a new TQT testing session, all previous data becomes inaccessible Shutdown: The process of exiting current tasks and applications and turning off the power to the Mo dality. Shutdown is

located in the Quick Menu in the lower left corner of each screen. SNOMED: (SNM3) code is a coded sequence of numbers that identifies attributes of a view. They are a standard naming and

encoding convention for identifying body part, position, and orientation in the DICOM header. standalone mode: When a modality is configured to be in a Capture Link System but is not currently operating with the

Capture Link System. Study: A collection of related images and data. A Study is started and ended on the Patient Input Screen. If a HIS/RIS is used,

ending a study sends a message to close the patient record. Study Status: Current state of completion for a study. Suffix: When used with the barcode reading function, it is an optional character following the standard content of a printed bar

code. Prefixes and Suffixes are used when necessary to differentiate bar coded data fields. Surround Mask: Fills in the area outside of the Region of Interest with a dark background. Enhances the ability to see detail in

soft tissue or low contrast areas of the image. System: A self-contained computed radiography machine or several machines joined together. System Recovery: A tab located on the Scan Status Screen on CR 825/850/900/975. Selecting System Recovery allows

access to Clear Cassette Jams.

T Technique: Imaging methods, exposure quantity and duration, positions, for performing X-ray exams. The goal is to produce

consistent, diagnostic images. Test Result Indicators: Colors that indicate the Status of test results when testing with the DIRECTVIEW Total Quality Tool.

Gray =Ready; Green=Pass; Amber=Pass; Red=Fail; Purple=NA. Text Box: The informational area that is viewed on a sheet of film. The Key Operator can configure the size and shape of the

Text Box, and the type of data that is recorded there. Thumbnail: A small view of an a cquired image. Any saved changes to an image are reflected in the thumbnail image.

Selecting a thumbnail anywhere in the system will open a full view in the Image Viewer Screen. Tonescale: An element of image processing in which a graduated range of gray values are constructed to optimize an image

for clinical diagnosis by highlighting the body structures of interest. Total Quality Tool: The DIRECTVIEW Total Quality Tool (TQT) is a series of tests, standards, and recommendations that

evaluate the image quality of the CR System and the quality of the cassettes used in the system. Trauma Button: On the Patient Query screen, this optional feature permits the immediate start of an exam without having to

specify patient demographics. The characteristics of the exam are specified using the Trauma defaults Trauma defaults: The Key Operator function to set up different Trauma exams for use with the optional Trauma feature. True-size Print: True-size printing delivers the image to the destination at the same size as it was captured (100%, +/- 2 %).

Note: Because of the variability in scanning, printing, and displaying images, use caution when using these images for exact measurements. For exact measurements, place a known marker at the level of the subject when making the exposure and calculating image magnification.


447/454

5/22/2018



U UID: Unique identifier: a number assigned to ensure unambiguous identification of a logical object in software (usually for a set

of data). Unassign: Disassociate an image from a patient record. Unassigned Image: An image that has not been connected with a patient exam record. Unassigned Images can be delivered

to all destinations except those designated as Mandatory.

V View: The description of an image its attributes. A View is specified by a body part, projection, and patient position. The Key

Operator may configure the automated processing of images individually for each View. For best results, use the View that best matches the image being created. View Modification: A tab in the Image Viewer that lets you invert the image, apply grid suppression to suppress grid lines, and

apply noise reduction to reduce the appearance of noise in low exposure areas.

W Water Mark: Disk High Water Mark and Disk Low Water Mark indicate the upper and lower limits of hard drive space use

permitted on the system. When the High Water Mark is reached, the Disk Manager deletes the oldest images until the Low Water Mark is reached. Window/Level: The mode in which the user changes the brightness and contrast of an Unprocessed Image. This mode is

used if the automated Image Processing is not satisfactory. Work List: The list of patient records that describes the patients to be examined during a given time interval. Workflow: A series of tasks necessary to perform a repeatable function.


448/454

5/22/2018


Index


449/454

5/22/2018


A accept image.................................................................61, 94

Capture Link Configuration Screen ...................................177 Capture Link icon...............................................................185

add multi-format print ........................................ 149, 156, 161

capture link server .............................................................215 EMC ..............................................................................212 logon .............................................................................213 safety ............................................................................212

add view..............................................................................59

capture link server status screen...............................214, 428

adding marker ..........................................................................119 multi-format print........................................................... 161

administrative analysis and reporting software................. 332

capture link system............................................177, 178, 187 destination profile..........................................................192 entering data .................................................................195 icons..............................................................................185 image processing..........................................................190 image review.................................................................196 long-length ............................................................198, 375 multi-format printing ......................................................197 removing a system........................................................210 standalone mode ..........................................................189 system requirements.....................................................208 troubleshooting .............................................................211

aec ........................................................................................ 6

Carestream Health, contact...................................................5

angle measurements ........................................................137

Cassette Cleaning........................................................................411

accessing logs .................................................................. 429 add a marker..................................................... 118, 119, 121

additional exam information.............................................. 104 adjusting crop box..........................................................................84 delivered image ..............................................................63 image quality ............................................................ 69, 76 surround mask......................................................130, 134

appending sessions .......................................................... 391 arrows .................................................................................99 artifacts, eliminating ......................................66, 68, 111, 112 assign image................................................................. 80, 81

Testing ..........................................................399, 400, 404 cassette ID.............................................................46, 48, 106 Changing.......................................................................228

assigning long-length images ...........................................376

cassette ID error ..........................................................48, 106 Duplicate ID ............................................................48, 106

auto associate.....................................................................96

cassette tests.............................................................399, 404

automatic surround mask.................................................. 133

cassettes ..........................................................................100 Jammed .........................................................................45

automatic trigger setting........................................................................... 222

B backup and restore ........................................................... 218 bar code failure ................................................................... 50 bar code programming................................................51, 235 beeper mode ................................................................227 configuration................................................................. 224 prefix and suffix ............................................................ 232 programming ................................................................226 Reread Delay................................................................233 samples ........................238, 240, 242, 244, 246, 248, 249 stripping fields...............................................................234 bar code scanner automatic data entry............................................... 49, 236 configuring....................................................................236 manual data entry........................................................... 49 beeper mode.....................................................................227 brightness ..................................................................... 15, 69 BSM ..................................................................130, 132, 133 buttons Print ...................................................................... 147, 151 Quick reference guide ......................................................9

C calibrating monitor.......................................................................... 281 touch screen................................................................. 282 calibration...................................................................... 6, 281 capture link........................................................................ 204

change password ......................................................423, 424 changing button colors .................................................................270 country code .................................................................229 data field size ................................................................231 field descriptions ...........................................................267 image processing preferences......................................298 image retention .............................................................269 language display ...........................................................286 look ...............................................................................307 prefix and suffix.............................................................232 screen layout.................................................................287 trauma defaults .............................................................324 view configuration details..............................................319 changing the view name....................................................176 chatter................................................................................401 Check SMPTE..........................................................................280 CISCO ...............................................................................353 CISCO Security Agent.......................................................353 cobb angle .........................................................................137 collimation..........................................................................374 collimation for LLI ..............................................................370 colors changing .......................................................................270 comment tab......................................................................116 composite image ...............................................................381 configuration bar code ..................................................................49, 236


450/454

5/22/2018


Index

capture link ...................................................................207 destination profile ......................................................... 310 HIS/RIS......................................................................... 263 long-length....................................................................268 multi-format...................................................................158 procedure mapping....................................................... 293 reject reasons............................................................... 295 remote devices .............................................................355

entering information...........................................................103 capture link system .......................................................195

required fields...............................................................297 scheduled workflow .................................................. 18, 19 view .............................................................................. 312

ordering...........................................................................30 error conditions Unable to eject the cassette .........................................45

configure text box.............................................................. 335

EVP Plus software...............................................................13

configuring data display ....................................................273 connect to capture link ......................................................177

exam....................................................................................55 entering data ...................................................................57 performing.....................................................................140 registration ......................................................97, 103, 174

connecting capture link system............................................... 177, 201

Exporting data ...................................................................332 in TQT ...........................................................................409

console connecting .................................................................... 177

exposure....................................................................303, 392

configuring Patient Query ................................................. 273

contrast ............................................................................... 15

entering patient information.................................................55 erase cassette .....................................................................40 erase lamp status tab ..........................................................39 erase lamps

Exposure Index..................................................................143

country code

F

changing.......................................................................229 CR..................................................................................... 215

field descriptions changing .......................................................................267

CR System.......................................................................... 14

flagging images ...................................................................64

create image copy ..................................................................... 63 study...............................................................................97

flat-field..............................................................401, 403, 419 folder....................................................................................17

cropping images..................................................................86

G

CSA Log Viewer................................................................353

grid line pair .......................................................................377

D

grid ratio.............................................................................377

data ...................................................................................218 restore ..........................................................................218 Deleting exam information..........................................................101 image record.................................................269, 328, 349 multi-format...................................................................160 patient information........................................................ 101 procedure step..............................................................101 records.......................................................................... 349 views............................................................................. 175 destination profile......................................................308, 310 destination summary statistics..........................................327

grid suppression ................................................................112

H harvesting images .............................................................276 HIS/RIS..............................................................................263 capture link....................................................................194 communication..............................................................429 configuration .................................................................263 polling query..................................................................265 histogram.............................................................................75 HR Scanning .......................................................................23

detail ...................................................................................15

I

detail contrast................................................................15, 69

IHE.......................................................................................17

DICOM .............................................................................. 321 DICOM GSDF ................................................................... 302

image delivery modes Pass-through mode.........................................................91 QA mode.........................................................................92

distorted long-length image...............................................383

image failure..........................................................62, 73, 132

distributing images ..............................................................95

image icons displayed .......................................................100

download statistics.................................................... 329, 332

image presentation......................................................73, 132

duplicate cassette ID................................................... 48, 106

image processing capture link system .......................................................190 changing .........................................................................15 contrast ...........................................................................79 controls .........................................................................305

E edit mask...........................................................................130 Elite .....................................................................................26 enable reduced border...................................................... 352 end study .......................................................................... 102

image recovery..........................................................203, 423 Image Review Screen .......................................................171


451/454

5/22/2018



image viewer screen ................................................... 77, 176

others ............................................................................127 removing .......................................................................123 time ...............................................................................129

images .............................................................................. 215 artifacts........................................................................... 62 distributing ................................................................94, 95 reviewing ........................................................................67 searching......................................................................162

mask..................................................................130, 132, 135

installing software ............................................................. 425

masking .....................................................................133, 135 applying.........................................................................135

Intensity Profile Compensation Filter for LLI ..................... 370

mask enlargement.............................................................317

K

measure gamma ..........................................................................284 measurement................................................................284

key operator functions.......................................................217

measurement tools ............................................................137

keyboard ............................................................................. 22

mini cluster ........................................................................206

L

monitor calibrating......................................................278, 280, 281 pod ................................................................................285

language display changing.......................................................................286

more image data........................................................104, 108

latitude ..........................................................................15, 69 increasing .................................................................15, 72

more patient data.......................................................104, 109

layout of screens............................................................... 287

MPPS ..........................................................................18, 102

line measurements............................................................137 lists.................................................................................... 170 creating on tabs............................................................291 rejected image..............................................................328 LLI .....................................................198, 268, 369, 375, 381

multi-format............................................... 197, 339, 341, 342 change multi-format configuration button......................149 text box .........................................................................344 multiple exposures processing.....................................................................158

LLI exam ...........................................................................370

N

LLI Image Quality..............................................................378

navigation buttons .................................................................9

local user interface............................................................365

new features ..........................................................................1

logon ...................................................................................31

noise ..................................................................................421

logs accessing......................................................................429

noise suppression..............................................................111

Long Length Imaging ........................................................369

number of cassettes for LLI...............................................370

long-length ........372, 373, 374, 376, 379, 380, 381, 382, 383

O

long-length grid .................................................................377 long-length imaging........................................................... 377

noise test ...........................................................................401

Operating the CR System....................................................14

LUI .................................................................................... 365

options activating.......................................................................350 image adjustments....................................................15, 68 registering .....................................................................350

luminance for gamma .................................................................... 284

P

M

pan and zoom mode..........................................................113

look ................................................................................... 307 Adjustment Tab ............................................................ 110

magnification..................................................................... 113 magnification glass ........................................................... 113 main menu ............................................................................7 main page .........................................................................394 malicious software ............................................................ 353 managing view categories ................................................ 320

pass thru delivery mode ......................................................91 pass-thru mode......................................................88, 91, 271 password changing .......................................................................424 forgotten........................................................................424

manual reboot ..................................................................... 25

patient information bar.........................................................37 patient input screen .................................... 99, 107, 108, 176 begin study button.........................................................107 more image data ...........................................................108 more patient data button ...............................................109

manual surround mask .....................................................135

patient query screen..........................................................169

markers adding...................................................................119, 121 deleting.........................................................................123 favorites........................................................................124 measures...................................................................... 125

patient work list screen..............................................163, 170

manual crop ........................................................................86

performing the exam..........................................................140 phantom.....................................................................389, 396 positioning.....................................................................389


452/454

5/22/2018


Index

phantom image test .......................................................... 414

high resolution.................................................................23

polling query HIS/RIS......................................................................... 265

scheduled workflow .......................................................18, 19

portable LLI SID ................................................................378

screen guide ........................................................................12

preference editor changes ................................................ 204

screen layout .....................................................................287 changing .......................................................................286

prefix and suffix................................................................. 232

searching for patients ........................................................164

print ........................................................................... 147, 151 printing long-length images............................................... 379 procedure step .................................................................. 273

searching techniques for images ..........................................................................164 patients .........................................................................167 prior exam .....................................................................169 work list .........................................................................170

procedure workflow............................................................. 59

security ..............................................................................353

procedures ..........................................................................59

Select Required.................................................................297

procedures list..................................................................... 98

Select Save Changes........................................................297

protecting records .............................................................349

Server ................................................................................215

Q

sessions appending .....................................................................391

QA by image .......................................................................90

setting the automatic trigger ..............................................222

QA Mode............................................................................. 92

shortcut..............................................................................360

procedure mapping ........................................................... 293

delivery preferences .....................................................271

R

reboot.................................................................................. 34 records deleting.........................................................................349 protecting...................................................................... 349

creating for Remote Access..........................................360 shutdown procedure................................................31, 32, 35 SID.....................................................................................378 SID Values.........................................................................383 single image external.........................................................343

re-deliver an image ........................................... 199, 202, 426

skin line enlargement...........................................................77 control ...........................................................................130

reduced border..................................................................352

SMPTE test target .............................................................280

region of interest ...............................................................303

SNOMED Code .................................................................321

reject reasons ................................................................... 295

software updates .......................................................423, 425 installing ........................................................................425

reject statistics .................................................................. 332 remote access software....................................357, 358, 360 remote devices..................................................................358 configuration................................................................. 355 remote key operator..........................................................357 configuring....................................................................357 remote security administrator............................................ 357 configuring....................................................................357 reprocessing ...............................................................74, 136

standalone mode .............................. 177, 185, 199, 209, 426 capture link....................................................................189 statistics download.......................................................................329 technologist...................................................................326 status capture link....................................................................184 stitching incorrect ........................................................................382

required fields configuring....................................................................297

streaks ...............................................................................401

reread delay ......................................................................233

surround mask .......................................... 130, 132, 134, 135

restart.................................................................................. 34

surround mask enlargement..............................................317

restoring data .................................................................... 218

System Recovery ................................................................43

result sort order................................................................. 273 reverse grayscale..............................................................115

system requirements Capture Link..................................................................208

reviewing images ........................................................67, 117

system response .................................................................24

ROI....................................................................................303

System Status ...................................................................429

ROP ..................................................................................215

T

S sample bar codes.............. 238, 240, 242, 244, 246, 248, 249 scan status screen ..............................................................40 scanning............................................................ 21, 27, 28, 47

study modes ........................................................................17

Tab ....................................................................................116 creating a list.................................................................291 Erase Cassette ...............................................................38 Erase Lamp Status .........................................................39 System Recovery............................................................43


453/454

5/22/2018



Tabs Scan Status Tab ............................................................. 42 View Look Adjustment..................................................110 Technique .........................................396, 397, 398, 403, 404 Improving...................................................................... 142 test phantom ..................................................................... 388 testing ...............................................396, 397, 398, 403, 404 TQT ......................................396, 397, 398, 403, 404, 406 text box ............................................................. 339, 341, 342 configurable.................................................................. 334 text boxes editing........................................................................... 345 external.................................................................154, 343 internal..................................................................153, 338 multi-format...................................................................344 selecting ...............................................................152, 336 Total Quality Tool ......................................................385, 388 touch-screen .......................................................................22 TQT........................................................................... 385, 422 additional tests...................................................... 410, 413 cassette testing............................................. 387, 399, 410 collimation.....................................................................393 determining the exposure............................................. 392 exporting data............................................................... 409 film-printer calibration test ............................................412 phantom image test......................................................396 phantoms, selecting .....................................................388 result indicators ............................................................ 405 results pages ........................................................407, 408 testing frequency .................................................. 386, 387 TQT Sessions ................................................................... 391 TQT test results exporting....................................................................... 409 indicators ...................................................................... 405 interpreting............................................................407, 408 optimizing ..................................................................... 404

hide a default ................................................................325 trauma button................................................................103 trauma defaults configuring ....................................................................322 True-size printing...............................................................155 tutor image.........................................................................100

U

unassign image .............................................................82, 83 updates available button....................................................425 using the touch-screen ........................................................22 utilities menu......................................................................423

V VERILUM Chroma 5 Pod ..................................................285 View...................... 59, 89, 173, 174, 175, 215, 306, 312, 380 adding ...........................................................................174 changing .......................................................................319 definition........................................................................173 deleting .........................................................................175 modes .................................................................88, 91, 92 selecting........................................................................174 set default characteristics .....................................312, 319 view configuration details ............................................59, 319 view name .........................................................................176 viewing images..........................................................114, 115 thumbnails.......................................................................89 viewing modes.........................................................88, 91, 92 virtual keyboard ...................................................................22 volume settings tab............................................................368

W wall unit SID.......................................................................378

Tracking monitor.......................................................................... 283

window and level ...........................................................65, 71 workflow.............................................................................178

trauma...............................................................................297 change trauma defaults................................................ 324 configuring defaults ......................................................322 entering......................................................................... 103 exams........................................................................... 103

Z


zoom function ....................................................................113 zoom level .........................................................................113

454/454

Kodak Cr Topics Soft. Ver. 5.2

Recommend Documents